glaserworks Miami University Middletown Commission 10005 ... · concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and

glaserworks Commission 10005

Miami University MiddletownFinkelman Auditorium

© 2011 Glaser Associates, Inc. 5/12/2011

FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK210000 - 1

SECTION 21 00 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes a summary of all Fire Suppression related work.

B. Related Sections:

1. 210500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 2. 210800 – COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION 3. 211313 – WET-PIPE SPRINKLING SYSTEMS

C. Work by Others:

1. The following work will be done by other contractors, as specified under respective headings, which this contractor shall read to ascertain what is called for therein:

a. General Construction b. Plumbing Including Fire Suppression Work c. HVAC d. Integrated Automation e. Electric f. Fire Alarm Equipment Supplier

1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Alterations and Additions to Existing Fire Suppression Systems

1. The Fire Suppression Work shown on the drawings and specified herein shall be included in the Plumbing Work Contract.

2. The contract shall include new work as shown, specified, or required, and shall include, but not limited to, the following principle components:

a. Provide limited area wet pipe sprinkler system in all new areas. b. Replace existing sprinkler heads in certain rooms. Rework piping as necessary. c. Provide requisite drain piping.

3. All work shall be performed in strict accordance with the City of Middletown and State of Ohio rules, regulations, and drawings.





4. Alterations and Additions of new and existing systems shall include the requisite rigging, wrecking, hauling, protection of permanent equipment and the building structures, and cleaning up. Care shall be exercised to keep dust and dirt to a minimum. All debris shall be promptly removed.

B. Installation of Pipe:

1. Codes:

a. All work, including joints, fittings, hangers, slope of piping, drains, etc. shall be installed in strict accordance with applicable City, County, and State laws and codes, and NFPA bulletins including latest revisions. All material and equipment shall bear U. L. label or similar acceptable identification.

C. Drains:

1. Provide 2” test valves and/or drain valves where required by code or at all low points in piping in all systems and extend drain piping to exterior of building.

D. Design of Systems:

1. Sprinkler Contractor shall lay out sprinkler heads and design piping distribution systems using the hydraulic calculation method based on NFPA Bulletin 13, unless specified otherwise. Refer to Section 21 13 13 for Hazard Classifications.

2. For compiling their bids, contractors shall layout and design a system using the hydraulic calculation method based on the sprinkler head location for the above coverage requirements and F.M. requirements. The successful low bidder shall submit his plans and calculations for approval to the Engineer and then to appropriate agencies and authorities for approval and permits.

E. Flow Test:

1. All calculations shall include flow test results. Flow tests shall be performed by the University Fire Marshall and the City of Middletown. Prior flow tests on file with jurisdictional agencies may be used in lieu of new flow tests only when previous test has been made within 3 months of project start date.

2. Contractor shall use 90% of flow test pressure data as the base in performance of the small calculations and the system shall be calculated from the flow test evaluation to the highest sprinkler head.

F. Shop Drawings:

1. As soon as possible after award of the contract, and prior to fabrication, the contractor shall prepare complete shop drawings of the sprinkler systems, which shall in general conform to the bidding documents; any deviations deemed necessary by the contractor shall be noted and agreed upon prior to starting the work.

2. In preparing his working drawings, the contractor shall coordinate the location of sprinkler heads and piping with the other contractors and with existing conditions. Drawings shall show ceiling grids, lights, registers, grilles, heat detection devices, access panel, skylights, etc. Any changes in fabricated sprinkler piping occasioned by lack of coordination shall be made by the contractor at no change in the contract price.





3. All drawings and calculations shall be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer before submitting them to the local fire department, building department, state, fire marshal, and the insurance carrier or insurance reviewing authority. Indication of review and/or acceptance by the agencies shall be certified by name of the reviewer, agency, and date affixed to the plans or reproducibles submitted.

G. Electric Wiring:

1. For all systems where the Fire Protection Contractor furnishes a control panel and heat detection devices, i.e., foam suppression system, contractor shall submit electric wiring diagrams for the systems along with their sprinkler drawings and calculations.

2. Contractor shall employ the services of an Electric Contractor, certified for fire alarm work by the State Fire Marshal, to install, wire, and test the above system including control panel, detection devices, alarm devices, etc., and include the cost for this installation in bid.

3. The project Electric Contractor shall extend a 120V, 1 Ph., branch circuit, remote alarm wiring, and systems alarm wiring to the control panel at no cost to the Fire Suppression Contractor.

H. Fees

1. Contractors shall pay all charges and fees pertaining to plan reviews, permits, inspections, etc.

I. Performance:

1. Fire protection work shall be performed by a Sprinkler Contractor certified for sprinkler work by State Fire Marshal.

2. Wiring for tamper switches, alarms, etc. shall be furnished and installed by Electric Contractor.

J. Excavation And Backfilling And Restoration Of Surfaces

1. Refer to Division 01.

K. Guarantee


L. Equipment

1. Any and all costs associated with piping, electric, wiring, conduit, supports, pads, or other modifications to accommodate installation for manufacturer=s equipment that differs from equipment layout on drawings shall be included on contractor=s bid. The contractor is responsible to insure that the equipment will fit within space allocated with appropriate clearances for maintenance, operation, servicing, and code.

M. Schedule






END OF SECTION 21 00 00 M:\MCEProjects\Mu\Mu2009.01 (Finkelman)\Spec\210000_fl.doc




COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

210500 - 1

SECTION 21 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Mechanical sleeve seals. 3. Sleeves. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Grout. 6. Fire-suppression equipment. 7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 8. Painting and finishing. 9. Concrete bases. 10. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.





210500 - 2

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Mechanical sleeve seals. 2. Escutcheons.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.





210500 - 3

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.5 SLEEVES

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.





210500 - 4

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw and chrome-plated finish.

E. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

2.7 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.





210500 - 5

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated

finish. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with

concealed hinge and set screw. f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw. g. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate

type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. Edit subparagraph below as required for seismic design conditions. Coordinate sleeve requirements with Division 21 Section "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation." Edit pipe size range in first two subparagraphs below to suit Project. Confirm that PVC materials are allowed for sleeves by fire authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions.





210500 - 6

c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

Delete first subparagraph below if not required.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

3. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

P. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

Q. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.





210500 - 7

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.3 PAINTING

A. Painting, if any, of fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct Chamford concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in

Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."





210500 - 8

3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.6 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.





COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION210800 - 1

SECTION 21 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes commissioning process requirements for Fire Suppression systems, assemblies, and equipment.

B. All work in this Section will be performed by the University. The University will be the Commissioning Authority. Contractor shall coordinate all work and assist as required to complete the scope of work in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.

B. CxA: Commissioning Authority – University.

C. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA.

B. Attend construction phase controls coordination meeting.

C. Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meeting.

D. Participate in Fire Suppression systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.

E. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation.

F. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period.





1.5 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for actual Fire Suppression systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be furnished and installed as part of the construction contract.

B. Direct commissioning testing.

C. Verify testing, adjusting, and balancing of Work are complete.

D. Provide test data, inspection reports, and certificates in Systems Manual.

1.6 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION

A. Provide the following information to the CxA for inclusion in the commissioning plan:

1. Plan for delivery and review of submittals, systems manuals, and other documents and reports.

2. Identification of installed systems, assemblies, equipment, and components including design changes that occurred during the construction phase.

3. Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's prestart and startup checklists for Fire Suppression systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be verified and tested.

4. Certificate of completion certifying that installation, prestart checks, and startup procedures have been completed.

5. Certificate of readiness certifying that Fire Suppression systems, subsystems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing.

6. Test and inspection reports and certificates. 7. Corrective action documents. 8. Verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of readiness.

B. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING PREPARATION

A. Certify that Fire Suppression systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents.





B. Certify that Fire Suppression instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded.

C. Certify that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been completed and that testing, adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.

D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).

E. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists.

F. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during each mode of operation.

G. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA.

3.2 Testing AND BALANCING VERIFICATION

A. Prior to performance of testing and balancing Work, provide copies of reports, sample forms, checklists, and certificates to the CxA.

B. Notify the CxA at least 10 days in advance of testing and balancing Work, and provide access for the CxA to witness testing and balancing Work.

C. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of Fire Suppression systems at the direction of the CxA.

1. The CxA will notify testing and balancing Subcontractor 10 days in advance of the date of field verification. Notice will not include data points to be verified.

2. The testing and balancing Subcontractor shall use the same instruments (by model and serial number) that were used when original data were collected.

3. Failure of an item includes, other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final testing, adjusting, and balancing report. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 dB shall result in rejection of final testing. Variations in background noise must be considered.

4. Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed portions can be performed.

3.3 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CxA.





B. Scope of Fire Suppression testing shall include entire Fire Suppression installation, through distribution systems. Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions.

C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors.

D. The CxA along with the Fire Suppression Contractor, testing and balancing Subcontractors, and Direct Digital Control Contractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for Fire Suppression systems, subsystems, and equipment.

E. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.

F. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.

G. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical.

H. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.

I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the Fire Suppression system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.

J. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.

3.4 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES

A. Fire Suppression Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Field testing plans and testing requirements are specified in Division 21. Assist the CxA with preparation of testing plans.

B. Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment requirements are specified in Division 21 piping Sections. Fire Suppression Contractor shall prepare a pipe system cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Provide cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating plan and final reports to the CxA. Plan shall include the following:

1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested, identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to Drawings for each pipe sector, showing the physical location of each designated pipe test section. Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment plan.

2. Description of equipment for flushing operations.





3. Minimum flushing water velocity. 4. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been cleaned,

flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated.

C. Fire Suppression Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of air and hydronic distribution systems; special exhaust; and other distribution systems.

D. Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of vibration isolation.

E. The following Fire Suppression system shall be commissioned:

1. Wet Pipe System.






BLANK PAGE

Commissioning Progress Record Page 1 of 1 Version 12/05

Commissioning Progress Record

Project:

Date: Building:

Location:

Approval Dates Equipment or System Document /

Activity Contractor Cx Authority Owner CM A/E

Doc Submittal Review

Requested Docs Received

Start-Up Plan

Cx Specification # Construction

Checklists

Start-Up Specification Section

Start-Up Report Start-Up Contractor

TAB

Start-Up Witness

Test Procedure

Other Retest

Other Training

Other O & M Documentation

Approval Dates

Equipment or System Document / Activity Contractor Cx Authority Owner CM A/E



Start-Up Plan


Checklists



TAB

Start-Up Witness

Test Procedure

Other Retest Other Training


Commissioning Training and Orientation Agenda Page 1 of 3 Version 01/06

Commissioning Training and Orientation Agenda Project:

Date:

Building:

Location:

Equipment/System: Spec Section:

Attendance. (Manager/ Supervisor signature and number of attendees from department)

Senior Facility Manager Number Attend Maintenance Mechanics Number Attend

Engineering Supervisor Number Attend Security Manager Number Attend Instructors.

Trainer Company Position/Qualifications

Approvals. This completed checklist has been reviewed. Its completion is approved with the

exceptions noted below.

Commissioning Authority Date Owner’s Representative Date


General Objectives. Ø Provide an overview of the purpose and operation of this equipment, including required interactions of staff

with the equipment.

Ø Provide technical information regarding the purpose, operation and maintenance of the equipment assuming all maintenance will be provided by Factory Authorized Technicians.

Ø Provide technical information regarding the purpose, operation, troubleshooting and maintenance of this equipment at a very detailed level, expecting that almost all operation, service and repair will be provided by the facilities personnel.

Agenda.

Item Covered Duration Instructor Completed

General purpose of this system or equipment (Owners Project Requirements)

Review of control drawings and schematics (have copies for attendees)

Startup, loading, normal operation, unloading, shutdown, unoccupied operation, seasonal changeover, etc., as applicable

Integral controls (packaged): programming, troubleshooting, alarms, manual operation

Building automation controls (BAS): programming, troubleshooting, alarms, manual operation, interface with integral controls

Interactions with other systems, operation during power outage and fire

Relevant health and safety issues and concerns and special safety features

Energy conserving operation and strategies

Any special issues to maintain warranty

Common troubleshooting issues and methods, control system warnings and error messages, including using the control system for diagnostics

Special requirements of tenants for this equipment’s function

Service, maintenance, and preventative maintenance (sources, spare parts inventory, special tools, etc.)

Other subjects covered, specific to the equipment:

Question and answer period



Comments:

Training Methods.

Type Comments Use of the O&M manuals, illustrating where the verbal training

information is found in writing

Manufacturer training manuals

Discussion/lecture at site

Site demonstration of equipment

Written handouts

Classroom lecture

Classroom hands-on equipment

Video presentation


Comments:




WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS211313 - 1

SECTION 21 13 13 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Furnish and install limited area wet pipe sprinkler system in all new areas.

B. Furnish and install the following:

1. Sprinkler zone main shut-off valves. 2. Zone flow alarms and test valves. 3. Sprinkler heads. 4. Mains, branches, drains, and related piping.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Fire-protection valves. 3. Sprinklers. 4. Alarm devices. 5. Pressure gages.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated.





1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working pressure.

B. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:

a. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. b. Classrooms: Light Hazard. c. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. d. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. e. Libraries except Stack Areas: Light Hazard. f. Library Stack Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2. g. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. h. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.

3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:

a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area. b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area. c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.

4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing. 5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:

a. Office Spaces: 225 sq. ft. (20.9 sq. m). b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft. c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. e. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

6. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless otherwise indicated:

a. Light-Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm for 30 minutes. b. Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm for 60 to 90 minutes.

C. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.





B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Domestic water piping. 2. HVAC hydronic piping and ductwork. 3. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Fire alarm devices. d. Technology Equipment (i.e. projectors-ceiling mounted; screens, etc).

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

F. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

G. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.





1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of three spare sprinklers of each type plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. Also, refer to Section 211000 for specific piping information.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe 2” and Smaller:

1. Pipe: Schedule 40 black steel, threaded. 2. Fitting: 125# cast iron or 150# malleable iron, screwed.

B. Pipe 2-1/2” and Larger:

1. Pipe: Schedule 40 black steel, grooved except at flanged valves, equipment, etc. 2. Fittings: Grooved, mechanical, bolted, malleable iron, (Victaulic) except at flanged

valves, fittings, and equipment where fittings shall be 125# flanged galvanized cast iron.

2.3 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES

A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

B. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44.

2.4 SPRINKLERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. 2. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. 3. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. 4. Victaulic Company.





B. General Requirements:

1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.

C. Sprinkler Heads:

1. Type “C” – Concealed, Ceiling: Type “C” heads shall be Reliable Model “G1”, concealed pendent, sprinkler, 165° with ½” orifice, 1” filed adjustment and white cover plate assembly. Sprinkler heads must be centered in ceiling tiles.

2. Type “D” – Exposed, Upright: Type “D” heads shall be Reliable Model “GFR”, Upright, 165° with plain finish and ½” orifice.

3. Heads must be centered in ceiling tiles, unless shown otherwise on the drawing. 4. Provide three (3) extra sprinkler heads of each type and wrenches in a steel cabinet to be

located where directed by Owner or Engineer. Stock of extra heads to include all ratings and types installed.

2.5 Drain and Test Connections

A. Drain and test connections for all systems shall each consist of 1” gate valve and 1” hose connection with cap. Install test connections where required by code and drain connections at all low points in system. Contractor may substitute SURE-TEST inspectors test and drain valves for the above valves. Extend valve discharges to outside of building. Coordinate location with Owner and Engineer prior to installation.

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Refer to Section 21 05 00.

2.7 SLEEVES


2.8 SLEEVE SEALS


2.9 GROUT






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sprinkler piping to building's standpipe system.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Engineer before deviating from approved working plans.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.

C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint device materials and installation in NFPA 13.

D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.

H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

I. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.

J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

K. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.





L. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/2 and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.

M. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

H. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

3.5 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Specialty Valves:

1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main





supply to system. 2. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection.

3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels. Center sprinkler heads in ceiling tiles.

B. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid.

3.7 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION


3.8 SLEEVE INSTALLATION


3.9 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION


3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform test and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 5. Start and run excess-pressure pumps. 6. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required. 7. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required. 8. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.

C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.





3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

3.12 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.

3.13 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Part 2.

3.14 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Part 2.






BLANK PAGE




PLUMBING WORK220000 - 1

SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes a summary of all Plumbing related work.


1. 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING WORK 2. 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 3. 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING AND PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT 4. 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 5. 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION 6. 220800 - COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 7. 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 8. 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 9. 221313 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 10. 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 11. 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 12. 221429 - SUMP PUMPS 13. 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES 14. 224700 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS

C. Work by Others:


a. General Construction b. HVAC c. Integrated Automation d. Electric e. Fire Alarm Equipment Supplier


A. Alterations and Additions to Existing Plumbing Systems





1. The Fire Suppression Work shown on the drawings and specified in Division 21 shall be included in the Plumbing Work Contract.

2. The contract shall include the installation of the work as shown, specified, or required, and shall include the following:

a. New Elevator on East Side

1) Rework storm drainage at existing footing. 2) Provide new storm drainage at new footing. 3) Provide code required drainage for new elevator pit. 4) Furnish and install new sump pump in elevator pit. 5) Replace existing storm area drain in adjacent landscaped area. Relocate

existing storm drain line. 6) Provide storm drainage (trench drain) along concrete walk into building. 7) Provide new roof drains. 8) Add complete secondary roof drainage system. This work includes adding

scuppers (by General Contractor) and secondary roof drains that will discharge to “day-light”.

b. Reconfigure and Construct New Restrooms

1) Rework storm drainage at existing footing. 2) Provide new storm drainage at new footing. 3) Replace existing storm area drain in adjacent landscaped area. Relocate

existing storm drain line. 4) Provide storm drainage (trench drains) along concrete walk into building. 5) Provide roof drains. 6) Add complete secondary roof drainage system. This work includes adding

scuppers (by General Contractor) and secondary roof drains that will discharge to “day-light”. Provide Smith Figure 1770T downspout nozzle.

7) Provide automatic plumbing fixtures with the photovoltaic and battery option.

8) Provide wall hung plumbing fixtures and the flush valves shall be equipped with manual override feature.

9) Provide new floor drains in all new and renovated toilet rooms. 10) Provide hose bib hook up for cleaning purposes in all restrooms. 11) Provide aesthetically pleasing access panels. 12) Extend building domestic city water and hot water and sanitary to new

plumbing fixtures. Extend sanitary piping to existing main on site. 13) Insulate new plumbing piping.

c. Provide ADA Accessible Restroom for Green Room and Seminar

1) Provide new ADA shower. 2) Replace existing shower. 3) Install new shower drains. 4) Provide requisite plumbing for reconfigured restrooms. 5) Provide floor drain. 6) Rework existing domestic water, hot water, and sanitary piping connections.

d. Provide ADA Accessible Restroom for Green Room and Seminar





1) Provide requisite plumbing for reconfigured restrooms. 2) Provide floor drain. 3) Rework existing domestic water, hot water, and sanitary piping connections.

e. Replace Drinking Fountains to Comply with ADA Requirements

1) Replace water coolers throughout the building with ADA accessible type, drinking fountains.

f. Replace Roof

1) Replace all existing roof drains. 2) Add complete secondary roof drainage system. This work includes adding

scuppers (by General Contractor) and secondary roof drains that will discharge to “day-light”. Provide Smith Figure 1770T downspout nozzle.

3) Insulate all new roof drains and associated horizontal piping.

g. Emergency Power - Alternate Bid No. P-1

1) Extend natural gas piping to serve new emergency generator.

3. All work shall be performed in strict accordance with the rules, regulations, and drawings of The City, The County, the local Water Department, the local Sewer Department and the Plumbing Division of the State Health Department.

4. Alterations and additions to new and existing systems shall include the requisite rigging, hauling, protection of equipment and the building structures, and cleaning up. Care shall be exercised to keep dust and dirt to a minimum. All debris shall be promptly removed.

B. Installation of Pipe

1. Roughing-in and locations of wastes shall be installed as near like the drawings as possible. Where the drawings indicate that the waste exceeds the code requirements, the roughing-in shall be installed in accordance with the drawings and not only to meet the minimum code requirements. Where unforeseen conditions will not permit the installation as shown, no water, waste, etc. lines shall be relocated without the written approval of the Engineer.

2. All piping located in pipe spaces must be located so as to insure maximum accessibility. Where necessary to cross pipe space, the crossing must be near the floor or 6 feet or more above the floor.

C. Excavation and Backfilling and Restoration of Surfaces


D. Guarantee


E. Equipment

1. Any and all costs associated with piping, electric, wiring, conduit, supports, pads, or





other modifications to accommodate installation for manufacturer=s equipment that differs from equipment layout on drawings shall be included on contractor=s bid. The contractor is responsible to insure that the equipment will fit within space allocated with appropriate clearances for maintenance, operation, servicing, and code.

F. Schedule


END OF SECTION 22 00 00




COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING220500 - 1

SECTION 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Painting and finishing. 10. Concrete bases. 11. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.



D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.







1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons.


A. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.




1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.


C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D. All work, whether shown on the drawings or specified, shall be installed in an approved manner to meet the structural and architectural conditions and to avoid interference insofar as possible with the work of other Mechanical or Electrical Contractors, all subject to the approval of the Engineer. Special care shall be taken in the arrangement of piping to secure a neat and workmanlike appearance and true alignment and grade. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before erection, removing all scale, burrs, fins, and obstruction. All pipe shall be thoroughly reamed, and ample provision must be made to allow for expansion of





piping without undue strain. All piping shall be sloped approximately 1" in 30'-0" to eliminate air and facilitate drainage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS






C. All pipe and fittings shall be of the best of their respective kinds as hereinafter specified and shall at all times meet the approval of the Engineer.

D. Where certain pipe is mentioned hereinafter in any part of the specification, such pipe shall conform to the requirements of the designated pipe under this title "Pipe and Fittings".

E. Standard specifications hereinafter referred to as "ASTM" are the specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials, together with existing addenda thereto. All references shall include subsequent revisions of said specifications.

F. All pipe shall be subjected at the manufacturer's works to a hydrostatic pressure test and only pipe which is tight and undistorted when subjected to such a test shall be used. All threaded pipe shall be delivered with couplings or sleeve pieces to protect threads from damage.

2.3 COPPER PIPE

A. Copper Tubing and Fittings shall be Anaconda, Chase, Mueller, Revere, or equal, Type K or Type L as hereinafter specified, 99.9% pure copper tubing complying with ASTM Specification B-88, Type K or Type L. All tubing shall be hard temper. All fittings in copper tubing shall be Mueller Brass Co., or equal, cast red brass fittings, containing not less than 85% copper, with soldered ends, or wrought copper fittings with soldered ends, and designed for 150 PSI (steam) and 300 PSI (water) pressure. All soldered joints shall be wiped smooth. 2-1/2" and larger flanged copper fittings shall be used at equipment and valves. All joints and fittings shall comply with the latest edition of ASME Code for Pressure Piping.

B. Drain Piping: Fittings in copper, drain, waste, and vent lines shall be cast or wrought D.W.V. copper fittings with soldered ends. All joints shall be soldered in accordance with the





recommendations and standards of the manufacturer for not less than 150 PSI and 250 service, using lead free nickel solder.

C. Water Piping: All soldered joints shall be soldered for 150 PSI, 250 service, in accordance with the recommendations and standards of the manufacturer, using approved lead-free nickel silver solder.

2.4 CAST IRON PIPE

A. Cast Iron Pipe and fittings shall be Charlotte Pipe & Foundry Co., Griffin Pipe Products Co., or Tyler Pipe and Foundry service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings thoroughly coated inside and out with hot tar varnish. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with the standards of the Soil Pipe Association and ASTM Standard Specifications for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings, Serial Designation A-74.

B. No-Hub Pipe, piping shall be secured with Husky Model SD4000, Mission Rubber Company Heavyweight or equal, couplings consisting of a neoprene gasket and stainless steel retaining bands (4" and down - 4 bands, 5" and up - 6 bands) and screws.

C. Gasket Pipe, joints shall be "Ty-Seal@ or approved equal, as manufactured by Tyler Pipe and Foundry Co. Pipe shall be hub and spigot service weight cast iron.

D. Flanged Cast Iron Pipe, piping shall be U. S. Cast Iron Pipe and Foundry Company (minimum wall thickness: 5/8”) cast iron with glands and bolts with fittings to match. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall be asphaltum coated on exterior. All joints shall be approved bolted mechanical joints with two wraps of fiberglass packing. (Fil-Tec, Inc. Model CB012-FRIDAY, 1/2” TP500 Type HD-500 Rope, -Aramac Supply Company).




1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.


2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.


D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.





E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith-Blair, Inc. f. Viking Johnson.

2. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Fernco, Inc. c. Mission Rubber Company. d. Plastic Oddities, Inc.

2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.





g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150 psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America.



1. Manufacturers:







3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length


2.9 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

2.10 ESCUTCHEONS







2.11 GROUT



2. Design Mix: 5000-psi , 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.





PART 3 - EXECUTION














1. New Piping:


finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished chrome-plated finish. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with

concealed hinge and set screw. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw.





h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.






2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.


4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.





1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements


















G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:





1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Painting, if any, of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."


3.6 CONCRETE BASES


1. Construct Chamford concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.




5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.





7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."



B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.


3.8 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.





GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220523 - 1

SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves. 2. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves.


1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.

2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.





220523 - 2


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

B. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

C. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller. 2. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size

and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.

D. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:





220523 - 3

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

E. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

F. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

G. Furnish and install all valves where shown or required for the proper operation of the system.

H. Valves shall always be placed in accessible positions for operation and repairs.

I. Provide chain operators on all valves 3" and larger installed more than 7'-0" above mechanical equipment and floors.

J. Valves 2" and smaller in copper pipe shall have solder ends and in steel pipe, they shall have threaded ends.

K. Valves 2" and smaller shall be ball valves unless shown otherwise.

L. All valves shall be designed for the following working pressures and equal in quality and type to the following:

2.2 Ball Valves shall be Conbraco Industries, Inc., Watts, or Nibco, full ported ball valves with cast bronze body with sweat or threaded ends, chromium plated bronze ball, stem, handle, teflon packing rings, seals, seats, etc. Each valve shall be rated 400 PSI WOG and 150 PSI steam and shall be bubbletight against 100 PSI.

A. Each locking ball valve shall have "Latch-lock" handle.

B. Each valve installed in insulated piping shall have 2-1/4" stem extension.

C. Ball valves shall be of the following type:

SERVICE

PORTING

Drain Valves with Hose Fitting Capped

Standard

All Other Drain Valves

Standard

All Other Valves

Full

77-100/200





220523 - 4

2.3 Gas Cocks Cocks 1" and smaller shall be all bronze with flat head, threaded ends, rated @ 150 PSI WOG; Powell Fig. 947. Cocks 1-1/4" to 2" shall be semi-steel, single gland, short pattern, lubricated plug valve with threaded ends, rated @175 PSI WOG; Powell Fig. 2200. Cocks 2-1/2" and larger shall be semi-steel, single or bolted gland, short pattern lubricated plug valve with flanged ends, rated @ 175 and 200 PSI WOG; Powell Fig. 2201.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.





HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220529 - 1

SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Pipe stands. 6. Pipe positioning systems. 7. Equipment supports.


1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Division 21 fire-suppression piping Sections for pipe hangers for fire-suppression piping. 3. Division 22 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides

and anchors. 4. Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.





220529 - 2

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Fiberglass strut systems. 4. Pipe stands. 5. Equipment supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Horizontal piping 6" and smaller shall be supported by steel clevis or split ring malleable iron hangers with adjustable rods.

B. Hangers for cast iron No-Hub pipe shall be spaced no more than ten feet (10') apart, at every horizontal branch connection and within eighteen inches (18") of couplings.

C. For all other piping: hangers for pipe sizes 6" shall be spaced not more than 12'-0" apart; hangers for smaller pipe shall be spaced not more than 10'-0" apart; provide one additional hanger at each location where pipe changes direction.

D. Hangers for suspended piping shall be Grinnell, Fee and Mason or Gateway hangers each to the following Grinnell Figure Numbers. Hangers shall be Grinnell Fig. 108 split malleable iron pipe ring and Fig. 114 turnbuckle, for pipes 2" and smaller; Grinnell Fig. 260, steel clevis for 2-1/2" to 6" pipe; Grinnell Fig. 181 adjustable steel yoke pipe roll for 8" and 10" pipe; and Grinnell No. 171, pipe roll with adjustable sockets for larger pipes. Adjustment shall be 2" for securing proper grade and alignment.

E. Pipe supported on floor shall be supported on Grinnell Fig. 259, Fee and Mason, or Gateway pipe consisting of cast iron yoke and nuts. Install on 3" Schedule 40 pipe with steel base plate.

F. Pipe supported on steel support racks shall be supported on Grinnell Fig. 271, Fee and Mason, or Gateway pipe roll stands consisting of cast iron pipe roll, steel rod and cast iron stand.

G. For any copper pipe or tubing, provide copper coated steel hangers or lead liners for hangers or riser clamps supporting copper tubing (if any are in direct contact with the tubing) and insulate so as to prevent condensation. In no case, solder one line to another for support.





220529 - 3

H. Supports for hangers shall be solid rods of ASTM A-107 steel with running threads on both end rods or shall be all-thread rods. Rods shall be sized according to the requirements of NFPA bulletins and shall be not less than the following:

SINGLE ROD

3/4" to 2" Pipe

3/8" Dia.

2-1/2" to 3" Pipe

2" Dia.

4" to 5" Pipe

5/8" Dia.

I. Piping shall not be supported from ceiling grid, ductwork, electric conduit, heating or plumbing lines, or any other utility lines, and vice versa. Each utility and the ceiling grid system shall be a separate installation and each shall be independently supported from the building structure. Where interferences occur, in order to support ductwork, piping, conduit, ceiling grid systems, etc., trapeze type hangers or supports shall be employed and shall not be located where they interfere with access to mixing boxes, fire dampers, valves, etc.

J. Hangers under new concrete construction shall be supported by concrete inserts, Grinnell Fig. 282, Fee and Mason or Gateway, malleable iron body and nut. Where additional supports are required, install, per manufacturer's installation instructions and load ratings (with 5:1 safety factor) Rawl or Hilti expansion bolts.

K. Adjacent to concrete and block construction, hangers shall be supported by Rawl or Hilti expansion bolts installed per manufacturer's installation instructions and load ratings (with 5:1 safety factor).

L. Under steel beam construction, hangers shall be supported by beam clamps, Grinnell Fig. 218, Fee and Mason, or Gateway malleable iron jaws with steel rod and nut. Where intermediate support between beams is required, contractor shall weld angle iron supports between beam or joists, top of angles being level with top of building steel.

M. Under bar joist construction, hangers shall be supported by beam clamps, Grinnell Fig. 218, Fee and Mason, or Gateway malleable iron jaws with steel rod and nut. Where intermediate support between beams is required, contractor shall weld angle iron supports between beam or bar joists, top of angles being level with top of building steel.

N. Any cutting and patching required to install hangers, supports, rods, or inserts shall be performed by this contractor..

2.2 SUPPORTS – VERTICAL PIPING

A. Supports - vertical piping shall be supported at intermediate floors with Grinnell Fig. 261, Fee and Mason, or Gateway steel riser clamps placed under hub, fitting, or coupling, and with approved solid bearing on floor construction.

2.3 ANCHORS AND GUIDES

A. Anchors and guides shall be heavy substantial steel anchors of type suitable for the conditions at





220529 - 4

each location, and place on the pipe lines where shown or necessary to force the expansion in the proper direction. Horizontal anchors shall be constructed of structural angles or shapes properly fabricated and securely bolted to the construction and fitted with clamps and welds to secure the piping. Guides, independent of the expansion joints, shall be installed on pipe lines on each side of joint completely in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations but not less than one guide at 4 pipe diameters and another guide at 14 pipe diameters from each joint to prevent buckling of piping. Certain guides for piping 4" through 6" size, where indicated, shall be Grinnell No. 255.

2.4 EQUIPMENT PADS, CURBS, AND BASES

A. For all new equipment, unless otherwise specified, the contractor installing the equipment shall form and pour a concrete foundation with chamfered edges of the height shown and 3" larger in plan than the equipment base. The contractor installing the equipment shall provide and set requisite anchor bolts for the equipment they furnish

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.





220529 - 5

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

L. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers..

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.





220529 - 6

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.





IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220553 - 1

SECTION 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 3. Stencils. 4. Valve tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.





220553 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TAGGING

A. All new controlling valves shall be identified with numbered 2" diameter brass tags attached to valve wheels or stems with heavy brass chains. Tags shall have stamped letters, to designate piping system, and numbers, i.e., - cold water CW-1, sprinkler SP-1, heating H-1, chilled water CH-1, etc.

B. The contractor shall prepare a printed chart, designating the location and briefly stating the function of each valve so marked, properly classified and placed in numerical order. The chart shall also contain complete instructions for the operation of the circulating system and component parts. Copy of chart shall be submitted to the Engineer for proofreading and approval. Approved copy of chart and instructions to be mounted and set in frame under glass and hung in mechanical equipment room. Bind a copy with each set of instructions to be furnished under the General Conditions.

2.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. The contractors shall include identification of all piping installed under their respective contracts. Such identification shall be in the form of stenciling.

B. Underground piping shall not be identified.

C. Contents of piping shall be identified within 3 feet of each valve, or near each branch. All other piping shall be identified along pipe runs at not more than 25 foot intervals where piping is concealed and 50 foot intervals where piping is exposed.

D. Identification of all pipe shall be made in the form of stenciling by applying one heavy coat of enamel and shall consist of identifying name in lettering at least 1" high, 8" long directional arrow below name, and a 2-1/4" wide band consisting of three 3/4" wide bands of different painted colors encircling pipe on each side of name and arrow. In addition, for insulated piping, identifying name shall also identify insulation type. Name, arrow, and bands for the same piping system contents shall be of same colors; colors to be used for various systems shall be as directed by the Engineer.

E. Piping contents shall be labeled as follows:

1. Domestic Cold Water - - - - - - - - DOM.C.W. 2. Domestic Hot Water Supply - - - -DOM H. W. S. 3. Domestic Hot Water Return - - - -DOM H.W.R. 4. Storm Water - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STORM 5. Sanitary Waste - - - - - - - - - - - - -SANITARY 6. Sanitary Vent - - - - - - - - - - - - - -VENT

2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. The contractors shall include identification of all piping and ductwork installed under their





220553 - 3

respective contracts. Such identification shall be in the form of stenciling.

B. Equipment shall be labeled with the same number appearing on the drawings and letters shall be 4" high using a heavy coat of enamel, i.e., Water Heater No. 1, etc.

C. Submit sample to Engineer for approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.






220553 - 4

BLANK PAGE




PLUMBING INSULATION220700 - 1

SECTION 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. The contract shall include all items of labor and materials required for the complete installation of the pipe insulation work as shown on accompanying drawings and hereinafter specified, including the following principal items:

1. All new domestic cold water. 2. All new domestic hot water piping (supply and return). 3. All new horizontal and vertical downspout piping including vertical stubs to roof drains.

Insulate pan of all roof drains as well. 4. For insulation of piping under sinks to comply with ADA requirements. Refer to Section

22 47 00.

1.3 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials:

a. Cellular glass. b. Flexible elastomeric. c. Mineral fiber. d. Phenolic. e. Polyisocyanurate. f. Polyolefin. g. Polystyrene.

2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Lagging adhesives. 6. Sealants. 7. Factory-applied jackets. 8. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh. 9. Field-applied cloths. 10. Field-applied jackets.





11. Tapes. 12. Securements. 13. Corner angles.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation. 4. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access

panels. 5. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 6. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 7. Detail field application for each equipment type.

C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:

1. Sample Sizes:

a. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2. b. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches square. c. Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches long by NPS 2. d. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches square. e. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full

range of colors available for each type of finish material.


E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

F. Field quality-control reports.






A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Use materials indicated for the completed Work.

1. Piping Mockups:

a. One 10-foot section of NPS 2 straight pipe. b. One each of a 90-degree threaded and flanged elbow. c. One each of a threaded, welded, and flanged tee fitting. d. One NPS 2 or smaller valve, and one NPS 2-1/2 or larger valve. e. Four support hangers including hanger shield and insert. f. One threaded strainer and one flanged strainer with removable portion of

insulation. g. One threaded reducer and one welded reducer. h. One pressure temperature tap. i. One mechanical coupling.

2. For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics, attachments, and jackets.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application. 5. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate





ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a bleachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Insulation of Insulated Piping at Fire Resistive Walls and Floors

1. Foamglass Pipe Insulation:

a. Insulation shall be molded foamglass Pittsburgh Corning AASJ-SSL@ covering, including a dual purpose fireproof, kraft aluminum foil laminated (white) jacket. Insulation shall be coordinated properly with paragraph heading APipe Hangers and Supports@ and shall be continuous through hanger rings. Insulation for chilled water supply and return piping shall be 1-1/2" thick; insulation for insulated piping penetrating walls and floors with fire resistive rating shall be the same





thickness as the adjoining insulation. b. Adjoining sections shall be butted firmly together and the longitudinal lap of the

vapor barrier jacket shall be sealed with the white flamesafe vapor barrier lap cement. End joints shall be sealed with factory-furnished 3" vapor barrier strips applied with flamesafe lap cement. Bands shall be applied over edges of joint seal strips and at center of each section of insulation.

c. Fittings: All fittings shall be insulated with preformed sectional foamglass units, mechanically secured and spiral wrapped with special vaporsealing tape with white exterior surface; all valve bodies, flanges, special fittings, etc. shall be insulated with a fiberglass blanket compacted to the thickness of the covering, and spiral wrapped with special vaporsealing tape; covering shall butt tightly to and tape shall overlap the foamglass. Exposed fittings insulated with fiberglass shall have an additional layer of insulating cement troweled smooth.

d. Jackets: Refer to Part 3.

F. Insulation of Domestic Cold Water and Horizontal Downspouts and Vertical Stubs to Roof Drains

1. Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation

a. Insulation shall be Johns-Manville "Micro-Lok", Owens Corning ASJ, Knauf, or approved equal, 1" thick fiberglass insulation in one piece molded sections with foil kraft universal fire-resistive and vaporseal jacket. Insulation shall be applied with kraft foil vapor barrier jacket.

b. The longitudinal seams shall be held together tightly by stapling the jacket overlaps with outward-clinch staples 3" on center; the overlap shall be coated with a vapor barrier adhesive before stapling. End joints shall be tightly butted and covered with factory furnished barrier tapes, heavily coated with vapor barrier adhesive, the ends of the tape overlapped and held securely with outward-clinch staples. Staples to be coated with vapor barrier adhesive. Ends of insulation shall be sealed off with vapor barrier adhesive or mastic.

c. Fittings: All fittings shall be insulated with preformed sectional fiberglass units, mechanically secured and spiral wrapped with special vaporsealing tape with white exterior surface; all valve bodies, flanges, etc. shall be insulated with a textile type glass fiber blanket insulation wrapped firmly under compression (2 to 1 minimum) to the thickness of the adjoining insulation and held in place with spiral windings of cloth tape. The blanket shall then be wrapped with special vaporsealing tape; covering shall butt tightly to, and tape shall overlap adjoining pipe insulation. Exposed fittings insulated with blanket insulation shall have an additional layer of insulating cement trowelled smooth.

d. Jackets: Refer to Part 3.

G. Insulation of New Domestic Hot Water Piping

1. Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation

a. Insulation shall be Johns-Manville "Micro-Lok", Owens Corning ASJ, Knauf, or approved equal, 1" thick fiberglass insulation in one piece molded sections with foil kraft universal, fire-resistive, and vaporseal jacket. End joints shall be tightly butted, and all joints shall be lapped and neatly stapled 3" on centers.





b. Fittings: All fittings shall be insulated with preformed sectional fiberglass units, mechanically secured and spiral wrapped with special vaporsealing tape with white exterior surface; all valve bodies, flanges, etc. shall be insulated with a textile type glass fiber blanket insulation wrapped firmly under compression (2 to 1 minimum) to the thickness of the adjoining insulation and held in place with spiral windings of cloth tape. The blanket shall then be wrapped with special vaporsealing tape; covering shall butt tightly to, and tape shall overlap adjoining pipe insulation. Exposed fittings insulated with blanket insulation shall have an additional layer of insulating cement trowelled smooth.

c. Jackets: Refer to Part 3.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.





3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.





N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

O. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.





F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division

07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.





9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.





3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.





2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.8 APPLICATION OF INSULATION

A. No insulation shall be applied until pipe work has been tested for tightness and approved by the Engineer. In case insulation is damaged due to leaks in pipe work which has not been tested for tightness, this contractor shall remove all such damaged insulation and all additional insulation necessary to replace the defective pipe work. He shall then replace new insulation at his own expense after pipe work has been repaired.

B. All pipe insulation shall be installed continuous through floor, walls, partitions, and roof. In case pipe sleeves are not of sufficient size to permit the continuous application of insulation, the contractor for the piping installation will do all necessary cutting.

C. In case piping or ductwork is installed at an insufficient distance from walls, other pipe, ductwork, or other obstructions to permit application of full thickness of insulation, the contractor for the piping or ductwork installation will relocate piping to permit application of full thickness of insulation.

D. All hanger rods must be perpendicular to piping before pipe insulation is applied.

E. Where clevis hangers are installed outside insulation; provide 12" long section of foamglass insulation at each hanger the same thickness as the adjoining insulation; also refer to Section on Supports.

F. In applying insulation, the sections shall be butted tightly together to provide effective insulation and exclude air where condensation must be avoided.

G. Existing insulation cut or damaged in the course of the work under this contract shall be repaired in kind.

3.9 FIRE SAFETY

A. All insulation, jackets, tapes, vapor barriers, adhesives, etc. shall be fire-safe (flame spread rating of 25 or less, fuel contribution rating of 35 or less, and smoke developed rating of 50 or less). All adhesives used and required in the application of pipe covering and insulation shall be Benjamin Foster, or equal adhesives, applied per the manufacturer's recommendations for





the specific application. All insulating materials, adhesives, jackets, etc. shall be of approved non-combustible or flame retardant type complying with the Local and State Basic Building Codes and N.F.P.A. Bulletin No. 90A.

3.10 FIRESTOPPING

A. All insulated piping which penetrates walls, floors, and/or roofs with a fire-resistive rating or smoke rating shall be insulated with molded foamglass "ASJ-SSL" covering, including a dual purpose fireproof, kraft aluminum foil laminated (white) jacket. Insulation shall be the same thickness as the adjoining insulation. Foamglass shall be installed and sealed as hereinafter specified.

3.11 INSULATION COVER

A. Inside Insulation: Exposed insulation inside the building shall be finished with a rewettable glass lagging cloth fabric 14.3 oz. per square yard applied over vapor barrier jacket, tightly stretched and pasted on with Benjamin Foster, or equal fire-safe adhesive, or equal cement. Seams in jacket shall be made on top of pipes or duct or toward the wall in such a manner as to make them as inconspicuous as possible. The covering and jacket adjacent to flanges shall be applied in such a manner as to give access for wrenches on bolt heads and nuts when plastic covering is removed. Covering in shafts and covering above suspended ceilings will NOT be considered exposed.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.






BLANK PAGE




COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING220800 - 1

SECTION 22 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes commissioning process requirements for Plumbing systems, assemblies, and equipment.


1.3 DEFINITIONS



C. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.





D. Participate in Plumbing systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.








A. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for actual Plumbing systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be furnished and installed as part of the construction contract.








3. Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's prestart and startup checklists for Plumbing systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be verified and tested.


5. Certificate of readiness certifying that Plumbing systems, subsystems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing.


1.7 SUBMITTALS




PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Certify that Plumbing systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents.





B. Certify that Plumbing instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded.









C. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of Plumbing systems at the direction of the CxA.











B. Scope of Plumbing testing shall include entire Plumbing installation, through distribution systems. Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions.


D. The CxA along with the Plumbing Contractor, testing and balancing Subcontractors, and Direct Digital Control Contractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for Plumbing systems, subsystems, and equipment.





I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the Plumbing system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.


3.4 PLUMBING SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES

A. Plumbing Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Field testing plans and testing requirements are specified in Division 22. Assist the CxA with preparation of testing plans.

B. Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment requirements are specified in Division 22 piping Sections. Plumbing Contractor shall prepare a pipe system cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Provide cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating plan and final reports to the CxA. Plan shall include the following:

1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested, identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to Drawings for each pipe sector, showing the physical location of each designated pipe test section. Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment plan.

2. Description of equipment for flushing operations. 3. Minimum flushing water velocity.





4. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been cleaned, flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated.

C. Plumbing Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of air and hydronic distribution systems; special exhaust; and other distribution systems, including Plumbing terminal equipment and unitary equipment.

D. Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of vibration isolation.

E. The following Plumbing system shall be commissioned:

1. Domestic water system.

END OF SECTION 22 08 00 M:\MCEProjects\Xu\XU2006.07(cup)\FINAL CUP SPEC AUG 2008\220800_fl.doc





BLANK PAGE



Project:

Date: Building:

Location:





Start-Up Plan


Checklists



TAB

Start-Up Witness

Test Procedure

Other Retest

Other Training


Approval Dates




Start-Up Plan


Checklists



TAB

Start-Up Witness

Test Procedure





Date:

Building:

Location:











with the equipment.



Agenda.


















Comments:

Training Methods.






Written handouts

Classroom lecture


Video presentation


Comments:




DOMESTIC WATER PIPING221116 - 1

SECTION 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Water Piping

1. Extend piping to new plumbing fixtures as required. 2. The entire installation shall be in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Local

Water Department.

1.3 SUMMARY


1. Aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building. 2. Escutcheons. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals. 4. Wall penetration systems.


A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following products:

1. Dielectric fittings. 2. Escutcheons. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals. 4. Water penetration systems.

B. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.





C. Coordination Drawings: For piping in equipment rooms and other congested areas, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:

1. Fire-suppression-water piping. 2. Domestic water piping. 3. HVAC hydronic piping. 4. HVAC ductwork. 5. Technology (i.e., projectors, screens, etc.)

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 HOT AND COLD WATER

A. 3” and Smaller

1. Pipe: Hard Temper, Type “L” copper, with solder joints. 2. Fittings: Wrought copper with solder joints.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.





D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.


A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. EPCO Sales, Inc. b. Hart Industries International, Inc. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Description:

a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 180 deg F (82 deg C). b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. EPCO Sales, Inc. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-

joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2.5 ESCUTCHEONS


2.6 SLEEVES






2.7 SLEEVE SEALS


2.8 GROUT


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.

D. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

E. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing valves.

F. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.

G. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

H. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

I. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

J. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.





K. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

L. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

M. Install piping free of sags and bends.

N. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

O. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.

E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:





Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions.

3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges:

D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes.

2. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.7 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION


3.8 SLEEVE INSTALLATION


3.9 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION


3.10 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification





for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.





3.12 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.13 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if

methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.





b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.






BLANK PAGE




DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES221119 - 1

SECTION 22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Wall hydrants. 2. Floor drains. 3. Trench drains. 4. Water hammer arresters. 5. Roof drains. 6. Secondary roof drains. 7. Downspout nozzles. 8. Trap-seal primer systems.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDRANTS

A. Wall Hydrant No. 1 (W.H. No. 1) shall be Woodford Model 65 P, Smith, Josam, Wade, or Zurn freezeless type wall hydrant, with polished brass face, bronze wall casing, vacuum breaker, loose "T" handle key, and wall clamp.





2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Furnish and install floor drains equal to the following types. Bids shall be based on drains of Jay R. Smith, Josam, Mifab, Wade, Watts, Zurn, or approved equal manufacture.

B. Floor Drain No. 1B (F.D. No. 1B) shall be Smith Figure 2005Y-B-CP, cast iron floor drain with no-hub outlet, flashing collar, and 5" square chrome plated strainer. Flashing for drains shall be Noble Chloraloy heavy gauge vinyl.

2.3 TRENCH DRAIN

A. Furnish and install the following trench drain where shown. Bids shall be based on drains of Neenah Foundry Co. or East Jordan iron Works.

B. Trench Drain No. 1 (T.D. No. 1) shall be a Neenah R-4995-A1 heavy duty cast iron Type “M” trench frame, foot long with 4” bottom inside caulk outlet. Both ends of trench shall be closed.

C. Cover for trench drain shall be a flat grated Type “A” ductile iron, five (5) foot long and shall be bolted to frame.

2.4 ROOF DRAINS

A. Furnish and install the following roof drains where shown. Bids shall be based on drains of Jay R. Smith, Josam, Mifab, Wade, Watts, Zurn, or approved equal manufacture.

B. Roof Drain No. 1A (R.D. No. 1A) shall be a Smith Fig. 1010Y-E-CID cast iron roof drain with no-hub outlet, extension, combined flashing clamp and gravel stop, and cast iron dome.

2.5 SECONDARY ROOF DRAINS

A. Furnish and install the following roof drains where shown. Bids shall be based on drains of Jay R. Smith, Josam, Mifab, Wade, Watts, Zurn, or approved equal manufacture.

B. Roof Drain No. 1A (S.R.D. No. 1A) shall be a Smith Fig. 1080Y-E-CID cast iron roof drain with no-hub outlet, extension, combined flashing clamp and gravel stop, cast iron dome, and 2” high exterior water dam.

2.6 DOWNSPOUT NOZZLES

A. Furnish and install downspout nozzles equal to the following type. Bids shall be based on nozzles of Jay R. Smith, MIFAB, Wade, Watts, Zurn, or approved manufacturer.

B. Downspout nozzle shall be a Smith Figure No. 1770 cast bronze nozzle.

C. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install downspout nozzles at the discharge of the secondary roof drains.





2.7 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts shall be Jay R. Smith, Mifab, Wade, Watts, Josam, or Zurn cleanouts, equal to the types hereinafter specified.

B. Cleanouts shall be full size of pipe up to 4", and 4" on all pipe exceeding that diameter. All cleanouts shall have at least a one inch adjustment.

C. Cleanouts shall be Jay R. Smith No. 4400C-BP cast iron caulk ferrule with cast bronze countersunk plug.

D. Where cleanouts are installed outside building, extend pipe up to a Jay R. Smith No. 4243S-U cleanout installed in a 14" x 14" x 4" thick concrete pad.

E. Cleanouts in concrete floors (no finish) shall be Jay R. Smith Figure 4253S cast iron cleanouts with no-hub outlet, cast bronze tapered countersunk plug and double flanged housing with heavy duty cast iron cover.

F. Cleanouts in finished floors shall be Jay R. Smith Figure 4163S cast iron cleanouts with no-hub outlet, cast bronze tapered countersunk plug and a square adjustable secured nickel bronze top with 1/8" tile recessed.

G. Cleanouts in horizontal pipes shall be Jay R. Smith Figure 4420C cast iron cleanouts with no-hub outlet and cast bronze tapered countersunk plug installed on Wyes or T-Wyes.

H. Cleanouts in vertical piping shall be Jay R. Smith Figure 4512S-Y cast iron cleanout tee with no-hub ends and cast bronze tapered plug.

2.8 PRIMERS

A. Trap Primer shall be a Zurn, 2" Z-1022.Z-.51PU all bronze, automatic, plain bronze body, integral vacuum breaker, non-liming operating assembly, gasketed cover with IPS female union connections.

2.9 FLASHINGS

A. Flashings for vents, shower drains, and floor drains shall be Noble Chloraloy heavy gauge vinyl. Verify size and coordinate installation with Roofing and General Contractor.

2.10 STRAINERS

A. Strainers shall be Mueller, McClear, Sarco, or Crane equal to the following types:

1. Strainers shall have stainless steel screens or baskets with the following perforations: City water - 1/16" (3/4” -4pipe); and 1/8” (5” and larger pipe).

B. Y-Pattern Strainers

1. Installed in Copper Pipe: Mueller No. 351M, 200 PSI W.O.G. cast bronze body with





screwed ends and cast bronze cover flange with BUNA-N O-ring seal and blowoff outlet and stainless steel screen.

2. 2” and Smaller Installed in Steel Pipe: Mueller No. 11M, 200 PSI W.O.G. cast iron body with screwed ends and threaded and gasketed cap with plugged blowoff outlet and stainless steel screen.

3. 2-1/2” and Larger Installed in Steel Pipe: Mueller No. 758, 200 PSI W.O.G., cast iron body with flanged ends, cast iron cover flange and plugged blowoff outlet and stainless steel screen.

C. Simple Basket Strainers

1. 2" and Larger: Mueller No. 155M, 200 PSI W.O.G. cast iron body with flanged ends and plugged drain outlet, cast iron cover with ductile iron clamp and BUNA-N O-ring seal, and stainless steel bucket strainer with handle.

2.11 UNIONS

A. Unions shall be installed adjacent to all new screwed valves and on all new pipes wherever necessary for convenience in erecting and repairing whether shown on the drawings or not. Unions in copper tubing shall be all bronze type with ground joint; all other unions 2" and smaller shall be malleable iron bronze mounted, with ground joint. Larger unions shall be standard cast flanges with gaskets.

2.12 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS AND ISOLATING FLANGES

A. In piping 2" and smaller, furnish and install Epco dielectric unions at juncture of copper and steel or iron piping, fitted with dielectric insulators and/or gaskets to prevent contact of dissimilar metals; each end to be of same material as pipe to which it is connected.

B. In piping 2-1/2" and larger and at flanged fittings and equipment, furnish and install isolation flanges at juncture of copper steel or iron piping, fitted with plastic sleeves around bolts and plastic washers under the bolt heads and under the nuts to isolate bolt from both flanges.

2.13 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. For Water Systems gauges shall be a 4-1/2" Palmer No. 40 SWLM, Weksler, Trerice, or approved equal, glycerine filled, pressure gauge each with stainless steel bourdon tube with stainless steel socket, 1/4" NPT stainless steel bottom connection, 2 of 1% accuracy, stainless steel case without mounting flange but with polished stainless steel ring, and with No. 872 pressure snubber and No. 735 needle valve.

2.14 THERMOMETERS

A. Thermometers shall be Palmer No. 3AA, Trerice, or Weksler, 9" industrial stem thermometer each fully adjustable to any angle with chrome plate extruded brass case, stainless steel trim, and stainless steel well in piping.





2.15 RELIEF VALVES

A. Pressure Relief Valves shall be Watts Regulator Co. No. 174A, Bell & Gossett, Cash, or equal, 3/4" ASME approved pressure relief valve.

B. Temperature Pressure Relief Valves shall be Watts Regulator Co. No. 1L, Bell & Gossett, Cash, or equal, 3/4" ASME approved temperature-pressure relief valve set at 100 PSIG.

2.16 PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE STATIONS

A. Pressure-Temperature Stations shall be a Peterson Engineering Co., Inc. No. 710, Sisco, or approved equal, 2" pressure-temperature test plug. Deliver to Owner one Peterson Engineering Co., Inc. Sisco, or approved equal, test kit complete with carrying case equipped with two pressure gauges each with adapter and two thermometers each with adapter

2.17 ACCESS PANELS

A. Where new valves, dampers or other equipment, requiring operation or maintenance, occur in inaccessible locations, such as above suspended ceilings, behind walls, etc., access panels shall be provided. Where access panels are not indicated on Architectural drawings, this contractor shall furnish and install flush metal access panels with frames of ample size for removal or repair of such equipment. Where removable ceiling panels occur, access panels will not be required.

B. Refer to Division 08.

2.18 WALL, FLOOR, AND CEILING PLATES

A. Wall, floor, and ceiling plates shall be installed at exposed points where new pipes pass through walls, floors, and ceilings. Plates shall be a heavy nickel plated metal plate of split type with springs or screws for securing flange to pipe. Plates for insulated pipes shall be of proper size to allow covering to pass through continuously

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install air vents at high points of water piping.

C. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.





3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.





FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS221313 - 1

SECTION 22 13 13 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Provide complete system of sanitary, vent, etc. for new fixtures.

B. Extend sewer underground to exterior of building. Connect to existing sewer as shown.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Cleanouts.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from sewer system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers





offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.


A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials.

2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts:


a. Josam Company. b. Mifab. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. e. Watts Industries, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div. g. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Description: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug.

3. Top-Loading Classification: Medium duty. 4. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe

and fittings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."






A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

D. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following: Revise three subparagraphs below to suit Project.

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install piping NPS 6 and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place-concrete supports or anchors.

3. Install piping with 36-inch minimum cover. Retain subparagraph above or first subparagraph below.

4. Install piping below frost line. 5. Install hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings Handbook." 6. Install hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook."

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:

1. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

2. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.

B. Pipe couplings, expansion joints, and deflection fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.





1. Use medium-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in landscaped areas.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade.

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground manholes.

1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate report for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. c. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. d. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction and the following:





a. Fill sewer piping with water. Test with pressure of at least 10-foot (3-m) head of water, and maintain such pressure without leakage for at least 15 minutes.

b. Close openings in system and fill with water. c. Purge air and refill with water. d. Disconnect water supply. e. Test and inspect joints for leaks.

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous material. Flush with potable water.






BLANK PAGE




SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING221316 - 1

SECTION 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

D. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."





1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.


A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS (UNDERGROUND)

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class(es).


C. Caulking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.4 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS (ABOVEGROUND)

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and deaerator drainage fittings.

C. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

1. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.





a. Manufacturers:

1) Husky 2) Clamp-All Corp. 3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. 4) Mission Rubber Co. 5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

2.5 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L (ASTM B 88M, Types B), water tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket,

metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 SANITARY SEWERS AND DRAINS

A. Beyond Five Feet of Building

1. Pipe: PVC sewer pipe, solvent weld. 2. Fittings: PVC to match pipe.

B. Underground to Five Feet Outside

1. Pipe: Service weight cast iron pipe, hub and spigot, with “Ty-Seal” joints. 2. Fittings: Cast iron to match pipe.

C. Soil, Waste and Vents – Aboveground

1. Soil, Waste, and Vents, 2-1/2” and Larger

a. Pipe: Service weight cast iron “No-Hub” pipe. b. Fittings: For piping shall be “No-Hub” with stainless steel couplings.

2. Soil, 2-1/2” and Smaller Serving Urinals

a. Pipe: Hard temper, Type “K” copper. b. Fittings: Cast brass fittings with soldered joints.





3. All Other Soil. Waste, and Vents, 2” and smaller

a. Pipe: Hard temper, Type “L” copper. b. Fittings: wrought copper fittings with soldered joints.


A. Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Sanitary Sewers."

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.

D. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.

E. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

F. Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight.

G. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

H. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

I. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

J. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and





smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

K. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:

1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturer's

written installation instructions. 3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

L. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.

C. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.

D. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Refer to Section 22 05 29.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.





3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.





B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.


M:\MCEProjects\Mu\Mu2009.01 (Finkelman)\Spec\221316_fl.doc





BLANK PAGE




FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING221413 - 1

SECTION 22 14 13 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Storm Sewer

1. Extend sewers from new downspouts, roof drains, etc. to outside building and connect to existing sewers.

2. Extend sewers from certain roof drains and connect to existing downspouts as shown. 3. Rework storm piping from new yard drains on east and west side of building, and make

connection to existing or reworked storm sewer.

B. Subsurface Drainage

1. Building shall be protected from the ground water with perforated drain tile. General Contractor will excavate for foundations, pour foundations and walls, and water proof foundations, walls, etc.

2. After General Contractor has completed his work on foundations and walls, Plumbing Contractor shall install subsurface drain tile as detailed.

3. Wrap drain tile with geotex tile fabric composed of strong rot-proof polymeric fibers formed into a woven fabric with a puncture strength of twenty five pounds and with 0.6 mm openings.

4. Backfill over file with an 8" layer of 2" x 3/4" crushed stone, an 8" layer of pea gravel, and a 12" layer of bank-run sand and gravel.

5. General Contractor will do remainder of backfilling. 6. Additional protection shall be provided by row(s) of drain tile below floor as shown.

Install top of tile 12" below finish floor. Wrap tile with fabric (Para. 3.3) and cover with a 6" layer of 2" x 3/4" stone.

7. Extend drain tile and connect to storm sewer.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.






1. Division 22 Section "Sump Pumps.”

1.4 DEFINITIONS


B. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

C. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

E. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working-pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.



B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS






1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.


A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class(es).


C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.4 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

1. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

Coordinate subparagraph and list below with Part 2 "Manufacturers" Article. Retain "Available" for nonproprietary and delete for semiproprietary specifications.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Clamp-All Corp. 2) Husky. 3) Mission Rubber Co. 4) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Beyond Five Feet of Building





1. Pipe: PVC Sewer pipe, hub and gaskets. 2. Fittings: PVC to match pipe.

C. Underground to Five Feet Outside

1. Pipe: Service weight cast iron pipe, hub and spigot, with “Ty-Seal” joints. 2. Fittings: Cast iron to match pipe.

D. Downspouts and Other Storm Drains

1. Pipe: Service weight cast iron “No-Hub” with stainless steel couplings. 2. Fittings: Cast iron to match pipe.

E. Drain Tile

1. At footers: 6” Perforated polyvinyl chloride (PVC) drain pipe. 2. Risers and Under Floor: Service weight cast iron soil pipe with stainless steel couplings. 3. Fitting: PVC or cast iron to match pipe.


A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

C. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping.

D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

E. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

F. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

G. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

H. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:





1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

C. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.



3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.

D. Connect force-main piping to the following:

1. Sump Pumps: To sump pump discharge.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.





D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.





SUMP PUMPS221429 - 1

SECTION 22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Submersible sump pumps.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps and controls, to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install the following sump pumps and sewage ejectors where shown. Bids shall be based on Peerless, Grundfos, Weil, and Weinman pumps as hereinafter specified.

2.2 SUMP PUMP NO. 1 shall be a Grundfos “Boss 100” and have a capacity of 12 gallons per minute against a T.D. head of 11 feet.

A. Motors for pump shall be 1/4 h.p.

B. The Electric Contractor will furnish and install receptacle.

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.

B. Motors for submersible pumps shall be hermetically sealed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and filling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing piping to verify actual locations of storm drainage piping connections before sump pump installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Pump Installation Standards: Comply with HI 1.4 for installation of sump pumps.





3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Storm Drainage Piping" and “Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping.” Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

D. Pumps and controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust control set points.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain controls and pumps.






BLANK PAGE




PLUMBING FIXTURES224000 - 1

SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:

1. Faucets for lavatories and sinks. 2. Toilet seats. 3. Fixture supports. 4. Water closets. 5. Urinals. 6. Lavatories.


1. Division 10 Section "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories." 2. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for floor drains, and specialty

fixtures not included in this Section. 3. Division 22 Section "Drinking Fountains".

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

C. Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-marble and solid-surface materials.

D. Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating.

E. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

F. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.





G. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.

H. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

I. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities "Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures:

1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M. 2. Plastic Mop-Service Basins: ANSI Z124.6. 3. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M.





4. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1. 5. Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction. 6. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 7. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets:

1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M. 2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M. 3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. 4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 5. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. 6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 7. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 8. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. 9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 11. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. 12. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings:

1. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1. 2. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. 3. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.

J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3. 2. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446. 3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 4. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 5. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 6. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 7. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

3. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed.





4. Provide hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, with separate compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above.

5. Flushometer Tank, Repair Kits: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed. 6. Toilet Seats: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Furnish and install all plumbing fixtures shown on the drawings, complete with trim, supplies, and drain. Trim valves shall have bronze stems, renewable bronze seats and renewable composition discs; supplies shall have stop valves, traps shall have cleanout plugs. Provide escutcheons where pipe passes through walls. All tubular brass products such as traps, tailpieces, extension tubes, etc. shall be 17 gauge brass (minimum). All of the above exposed metal parts, including brass nuts, shall be chromium plated. Contractor shall caulk between all fixtures and adjacent surfaces.

B. Bids shall be based on American Standard, Crane, Eljer, Sloan, Zurn, or Kohler Fixtures with Smith, Josam, Zurn, or Wade chair carriers suitable for floor construction, and faucets of American Standard, T & S. Brass, or Chicago Faucet manufacturer. A complete illustrated folder, showing all fixtures, shall be prepared by the contractor and submitted for approval before the fixtures are ordered.

C. Note: Fixtures are shown on the drawings by number with the prefix "PL".

2.2 LAVATORY – ARM SUPPORTS

A. Fixture PL – 1D – Lavatory (Handicapped – Automatic)

1. Kohler “SOHO” No. K-2084-0, 20" x 18", white vitreous china, single center faucet hole, self-draining faucet ledge with contoured back and side splash shields, and front overflow. Lavatory shall be mounted on a concealed chair carrier with front rim 34" above floor.

2. Faucet shall be a Sloan Solis Model EAF-275-1SM on-demand, automatic sensor-operated brass lavatory faucet with polished chrome exterior. Provide requisite batteries. Faucet shall be complete with an integral photo-voltair collector to power automatic feature. Faucets shall have adjustable mixing valves in supplies, and have 3/8” compression supply fittings.

3. Furnish Chicago Faucet No. 1004 angle supplies and stops, and a McGuire No. 155WC offset grid drain with overflow inlet and tailpiece and a McGuire No. 8872, 1-1/4” chrome plated P-trap. Tailpiece, trap, supplies and stops shall be wrapped with Truebro, Inc. white vinyl kit, Model No. 103, with “flip top” access.

B. Fixture PL-2G – (Handicapped)

1. American Standard “Ovalyn II” No.0497.012. 19” x 15-5/8”, white, oval, vitreous china, unglazed rim for under counter mount, rear overflow. Counter top by General Contractor.





2. Faucet shall be a Sloan Solis Model EAF-275-1SM on-demand, automatic sensor-operated brass lavatory faucet with polished chrome exterior. Provide requisite batteries. Faucet shall be complete with an integral photo-voltair collector to power automatic feature. Faucets shall have adjustable mixing valves in supplies, and have 3/8” compression supply fittings.

3. Furnish Chicago Faucet No. 1004 angle supplies and stops, and a McGuire No. 155WC offset grid drain with overflow inlet and tailpiece and a McGuire No. 8872, 1-1/4” chrom plated P-trap. Tailpiece, trap, supplies and stops shall be wrapped with Truebro, Inc. white vinyl kit, Model No. 103, with “flip top” access.

2.3 WATER CLOSET

A. Fixture PL-3C - Water Closet (General-Auto)

1. American Standard “Afwall” EL 1.6 No. 2257.103, elongated white vitreous china siphon jet, wall hung with china bolt caps, and an Olsonite Comfort Curve Model No. 95 white, solid plastic, seat with open front and stainless steel hinge. Install water closet on a concealed chair carrier with top of seat 15" above floor.

2. Flush valve shall be a Sloan Series Solis Model 8111-1.6/1.1 Automatic Sensor-Operated, low consumption flush, diaphragm type, brass valve with polished chrome exterior. Provide requisite batteries. Valve shall be an integral photo-voltair collector to power automatic feature and a 1" screwdriver-operated angle stop valve with siphon-gard backcheck protection. Unit shall have two flush settings at 1.6 gallon per flush and 1.1 gallon per flush. The valve shall be furnished complete with a cast wall flange with setscrew, sweat solder kit, control stop cover, vacuum breaker, 1-1/2" flush tube, fixture spud escutcheon, fixture spud securing nut, electrical box cover plates, cover tubes, and cover rings. Electrical boxes; conduit and wiring by Electrical Contractor.

B. Fixture PL-3D - Water Closet (Handicapped - Auto)

1. American Standard "Afwall" EL 1.6 No. 2257.103, elongated white vitreous china siphon jet, wall hung with china bolt caps, and an Olsonite Comfort Curve Model No. 95 white, solid plastic, seat with open front and stainless steel hinge. Install water closet on a concealed chair carrier with top of seat 18" above floor.

2. Flush valve shall be a Sloan Series Solis Model 8111-1.6/1.1 Automatic Sensor-Operated, low consumption flush, diaphragm type, brass valve with polished chrome exterior. Provide requisite batteries. Valve shall be an integral photo-voltair collector to power automatic feature and a 1" screwdriver-operated angle stop valve with siphon-gard backcheck protection. Unit shall have two flush settings at 1.6 gallon per flush and 1.1 gallon per flush. The valve shall be furnished complete with a cast wall flange with setscrew, sweat solder kit, control stop cover, vacuum breaker, 1-1/2" flush tube, fixture spud escutcheon, fixture spud securing nut, electrical box cover plates, cover tubes, and cover rings. Electrical boxes; conduit and wiring by Electrical Contractor.

2.4 URINAL

1. Fixture PL – 4C – Urinal (General-Auto):

a. Sloan Model WEUS 1000.1201-0.13 Solis, Optima Plus Systems, solar-powered





flushometer and urinal, white vitreous china, wall hung, washout with top spud. Install urinal on concealed chair carrier with rim (lip) 24" above floor.

b. Flush valve shall be a Solar Powered Automatic Sensor-Operated, low consumption flush, diaphragm type, brass valve with polished chrome exterior. Provide requisite batteries. Valve shall be an integral photo-voltair collector to power automatic feature and a 3/4" screwdriver-operated angle stop valve with siphon-gard backcheck protection. The valve shall be furnished complete with a cast wall flange with setscrew, sweat solder kit, control stop cover, vacuum breaker, fixture spud escutcheon, fixture spud securing nut, courtesy flush override button, and adjustable tailpiece.

2. Fixture PL – 4D – Urinal (Handicapped-Auto):

a. Sloan Model WEUS 1000.1201-0.13 Solis, Optima Plus Systems, solar-powered flushometer and urinal, white vitreous china, wall hung, washout with top spud. Install urinal on concealed chair carrier with rim (lip) 17" above floor.

b. Flush valve shall be a Solar Powered Automatic Sensor-Operated, low consumption flush, diaphragm type, brass valve with polished chrome exterior. Provide requisite batteries. Valve shall be an integral photo-voltair collector to power automatic feature and a 3/4" screwdriver-operated angle stop valve with siphon-gard backcheck protection. The valve shall be furnished complete with a cast wall flange with setscrew, sweat solder kit, control stop cover, vacuum breaker, fixture spud escutcheon, fixture spud securing nut, courtesy flush override button, and adjustable tailpiece.

2.5 JANITOR RECEPTOR

A. Fixture PL-6A - Janitor Receptor:

1. Fiat Precast Terrazzo Model TSB-100, 24"L x 24"W with 12" high walls finished with stainless steel cap on curbs. The 3" drain shall be caulk type cast brass with removable stainless steel strainer. Furnish and install the following Fiat accessories: No. 889-CC mop hanger and No. 832-AA hose and bracket. Seal around basin with No. 833-AA silicone sealant.

2. Faucet to be a Chicago Faucet No. 897 chrome plated with wall brace, vacuum breaker and integral stops.

2.6 SHOWER

A. Fixture PL-8F – Shower – (Handicapped)

1. General Contractor will construct a shower receptor. Plumbing Contractor shall install a 3” F.D. No. 1B floor drain, trap, waste, and vent.

2. Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install a Symmons “Temptrol” No. S-96-300-X-B24 pressure balancing valve, factory set maximum outlet temperature of 110°, integral stops, a wall spout, and a hand-held shower head with flexible metal-clad hose, and 24” slide bar with slide bracket and wall bracket.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.

B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures. 2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping. 3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.

E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

F. Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall bracket and onto waste fitting seals.

G. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

H. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

I. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

J. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.

K. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.





L. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

M. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment.

N. Install toilet seats on water closets.

O. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

P. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.

Q. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

R. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

S. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

T. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

U. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.





B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and] flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.

C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and3. other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following:

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts.

2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.






BLANK PAGE




DRINKING FOUNTAINS224700 - 1

SECTION 22 47 00 DRINKING FOUNTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following drinking fountains and related components:

1. Drinking fountains. 2. Fixture supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Drinking Fountain: Fixture that can be approached and used by people with disabilities.

B. Cast Polymer: Dense, cast-filled-polymer plastic.

C. Drinking Fountain: Fixture with nozzle for delivering stream of water for drinking.

D. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of fixture.

E. Fixture: Drinking fountain unless one is specifically indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each fixture indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act" ; for fixtures for people with disabilities.





B. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Filter Cartridges: Provide two extra filters for each drinking fountain provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRINKING FOUNTAINS

A. Drinking Fountains:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product specified herein or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. Halsey Taylor. c. Oasis Corporation.

2. Fixture PL-7J – Drinking Fountain – (Dual Cabinets)

a. Halsey Taylor Model OVL-II series bi-level fountain. Fountain shall include pushbar valve on front, contour-formed basin to eliminate splashing and standing water, and rounded corners and edges. Bubbler shall be chrome plated, two stream, mound building type. All water piping to be copper tubing. Fountain shall be mounted on concealed wall bracket.

b. The panel shall be constructed of stainless steel number 300 series with satin finish. Panel overlaps wall opening ½”. Unit shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed and shall comply with ARI Standard. Furnish and install a McGuire No. 8872, 1-1/4” chrome plated P-trap and make waste and water connections.

c. Filter: One or more water filters complying with NSF 42 and NSF 53 for cyst and lead reduction to below EPA standards; with capacity sized for unit peak flow rate.

d. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum horizontal waste and trap complying with ASME A112.18.2.

2.2 FIXTURE SUPPORTS


1. Josam Co. 2. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc. 3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 4. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.





5. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

B. Description: ASME A112.6.1M, water cooler carriers. Include vertical, steel uprights with feet and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs matching fixture to be supported.

1. Type I: Hanger-type carrier with two vertical uprights. 2. Type II: Bilevel, hanger-type carrier with three vertical uprights. 3. Supports for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights instead of

steel pipe uprights.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping and types of supports match those indicated.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Use carrier off-floor supports for wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view. Plain copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install fixtures level and plumb.

C. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

D. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system.

E. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."





F. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

3.6 CLEANING

A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.





HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING WORK

230000 - 1

SECTION 23 00 00 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes a summary of all Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning related work.


1. 230500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 2. 230513 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 3. 230519 – PIPING SPECIALTIES FOR HVAC PIPING 4. 230523 – GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 5. 230529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 6. 230553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 7. 230593 – TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 8. 230700 – HVAC INSULATION 9. 230800 – COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 10. 232111 – PIPING MATERIALS 11. 232112 – HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM 12. 232113 – HYDRONIC PIPING 13. 232500 – HVAC WATER TREATMENT 14. 233113 – METAL DUCTS 15. 233300 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 16. 233416 – CENTRIFUGAL HVAC– AIR TERMINAL UNITS 17. 233713 – DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 18. 238316 – RADIANT HEAT HYDRONIC PIPING 19. 238317 – RADIANT HEATING INJECTION MIXING SYSTEM AND CONTROLS

C. Work by Others:


a. General Construction b. Plumbing Including Fire Suppression Work c. Integrated Automation d. Electric e. Fire Alarm Equipment Supplier





230000 - 2

1.3 Project Conditions

A. Description of new HVAC Systems:

1. The contract shall include the installation of the work as shown, specified, or required and shall include, but not limited to, the following:


1) Extend the existing HVAC system into new area. Provide radiant system for heating including controls.

2) Provide new exhaust fan system for elevator equipment room. 3) Insulate new ductwork.


1) Extend the existing HVAC system into new area. Provide radiant system for heating including controls.

2) Provide extremely quiet exhaust systems for the restrooms. This concern is particularly important for the restroom that is immediately behind the auditorium and underneath the sound booth.

3) Insulate new ductwork.

c. Provide ADA Accessible Restrooms for Dressing Rooms

1) Provide new exhaust system for reconfigured restrooms.


1) Provide new exhaust system for reconfigured restroom.

e. General Overview

1) Provide radiant heating systems. 2) Extend new hot water piping for radiant heating system. 3) Perform final setting and leveling of all new equipment. 4) Provide certain pipe insulation. 5) Provide requisite drain piping. 6) Provide certain new ductwork, grilles, diffusers, louvers, etc. 7) Provide certain duct insulation. 8) Provide controls for new radiant heating systems.

2. Coordinate interface with temperature controls provided by Integrated Automation Contractor with new systems.

3. Alterations and additions to new systems shall include the requisite rigging, wrecking, hauling, protection of permanent equipment and the building structure, and cleaning up. Care shall be exercised to keep dust and dirt to a minimum. All debris shall be promptly removed.

B. Excavation And Backfilling And Restoration Of Surfaces





230000 - 3


C. Guarantee


D. Equipment


E. Schedule







230000 - 4

BLANK PAGE




COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC230500 - 1

SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Painting and finishing. 10. Concrete bases. 11. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.



D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.







1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.




1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.






C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS









1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.


2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.


D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.






A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150 psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp.





G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America.



1. Manufacturers:





2.6 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

2.7 ESCUTCHEONS











2.8 GROUT



2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


















1. New Piping:


finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished chrome-plated finish. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with

concealed hinge and set screw. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw. h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate

type.






2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.


4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.









1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

















G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Painting, if any, of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."


3.6 CONCRETE BASES






1. Construct chamford concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.




5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in

Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."



B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.






COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

230513 - 1

SECTION 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.




COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

230513 - 2

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)





PIPING SPECIALTIES FOR HVAC PIPING230519 - 1

SECTION 23 05 19 PIPING SPECIALTIES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Unions. 2. Dielectric Fittings and Isolating Flanges. 3. Pressure-Temperature Test Stations. 4. Air Vents. 5. Wall, Floor, and Ceiling Plates. 6. Wells and Outlets.


1. Division 23 Section "Facility Natural-Gas Piping" for gas meters.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Certificates: For each type of device, from manufacturer.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each device to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRAINERS

A. Strainers shall be Mueller, McClear, Sarco, Armstrong, or Crane equal to the following types:

1. Strainers shall have stainless steel screens or baskets with the following perforations: City, Hot, or chilled water - 1/16" (3/4"-4"pipe) and 1/8" (5" and larger pipe); condensing water - 1/8" ; oil - (.020); steam - 3/64".

B. Y-Pattern Strainers





1. Installed in Copper Pipe: Mueller No. 351M, Class 125 cast bronze body with screwed ends and cast bronze cover flange with BUNA-N O-ring seal and plugged blowoff outlet and stainless steel screen.

2. 2" and Smaller Installed in Steel Pipe: Mueller No. 11M, Class 250, cast iron body with screwed ends and threaded and gasketed cap with plugged blowoff outlet and stainless steel screen.

2.2 UNIONS

A. Unions shall be installed adjacent to all new screwed valves and on all new pipes wherever necessary for convenience in erecting and repairing whether shown on the drawings or not. Unions in copper tubing shall be all bronze type with ground joint; all other unions 2" and smaller shall be malleable iron bronze mounted, with ground joint. Larger unions shall be standard cast flanges with gaskets.

2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS AND ISOLATING FLANGES

A. In piping 2" and smaller, furnish and install Epco dielectric unions at juncture of copper and steel or iron piping, fitted with dielectric insulators and/or gaskets to prevent contact of dissimilar metals; each end to be of same material as pipe to which it is connected.

2.4 PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE STATIONS

A. Pressure-Temperature Stations shall be a Peterson Engineering Co., Inc. No. 710, Sisco, or approved equal, 2" pressure-temperature test plug. Deliver to Owner one Peterson Engineering Co., Inc. Sisco, or approved equal, test kit complete with carrying case equipped with two pressure gauges each with adapter and two thermometers each with adapter.

2.5 AIR VENTS

A. Manual Air Vents shall be a Hoffman No. 500 Anderson, Crane, Fischer, or equal. Air vents shall have an operating pressure of 75 PSI and a withstand hydrostatic pressure of 200 PSI.

2.6 ACCESS PANELS

A. Where new valves or other equipment, requiring operation or maintenance, occur in inaccessible locations, such as above suspended ceilings, behind walls, etc., access panels shall be provided. Where access panels are not indicated on Architectural drawings, this contractor shall furnish and install flush metal access panels with frames of ample size for removal or repair of such equipment. Where removable ceiling panels occur, access panels will not be required.

B. Refer to Division 08.





2.7 WALL, FLOOR, AND CEILING PLATES

A. Wall, floor, and ceiling plates shall be installed at exposed points where new pipes pass through walls, floors, and ceilings. Plates shall be a heavy nickel plated metal plate of split type with springs or screws for securing flange to pipe. Plates for insulated pipes shall be of proper size to allow covering to pass through continuously.

2.8 ROOF CURBS

A. Equipment Supports on roof shall be The Pate Company Model ES-2, Custom Curb, or Thycurb support. Equipment support shall be constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel, with integral base plate, with pressure treated wood nailer and counterflashing with lag screws. Support shall be internally reinforced to support the weight of the equipment.

B. Pipe Curb for vents passing through the roof shall be The Pate Company Model PCA-2, Custom Curb, or Thycurb roof curb with a PCC pipe curb cover assembly and requisite flashing.

2.9 WELLS AND OUTLETS

A. Contractor shall install all wells and outlets in piping where required for instruments and controls specified herein and in the controls section, all of proper size and type for the device

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install test plugs in piping tees.

B. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.






BLANK PAGE




GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING230523 - 1

SECTION 23 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Calibrated Balancing valves. 2. Ball valves. 3. Other Balancing Valves.


1. Division 23 HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 2. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and

schedules.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.






A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions and the following features:

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and





protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

H. Furnish and install all valves where shown or required for the proper operation of the system.

I. Valves shall always be placed in accessible positions for operation and repairs.

J. Valves 2" and smaller in copper pipe shall have solder ends and in steel pipe, they shall have threaded ends. Valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be flanged valves.

K. All valves shall be designed for the following working pressures and shall be Powell, Lunkenheimer, Crane, Grinnell, Stockham, or equal make, and equal in quality and type to the following:

2.2 Ball Valves shall be Conbraco Industries, Inc., Watts, or Nibco, full ported ball valves with cast bronze body with sweat or threaded ends, chromium plated bronze ball, stem, handle, teflon packing rings, seals, seats, etc. Each valve shall be rated 400 PSI WOG and 150 PSI steam and shall be bubbletight against 100 PSI.

A. Each locking ball valve shall have "Latch-lock" handle.

B. Each valve installed in insulated piping shall have 2-1/4" stem extension.

C. Ball valves shall be of the following types:

SERVICE

PORTING

Drain Valves with Hose Fitting Capped

Standard

All Other Drain Valves

Standard

All Other Valves

Full

77-100/200





2.3 Calibrated Balance Valves shall be Bell & Gossett "Circuit Setter" type C.B., or Armstrong Type CBV, all bronze, calibrated balancing valves with indicator and two capped readout ports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.





HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

230529 - 1

SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equipment:

1. Hangers and supports. 2. Supports – vertical piping. 3. Anchors and guides. 4. Equipment pads, curbs, and bases.


1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for fire-protection piping.

3. Division 23 Section " Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe guides and anchors.

4. Division 23 Section " Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.

5. Division 23 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

2. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.





230529 - 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Pipe stands. 3. Equipment supports.

C. Welding certificates.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code – Steel.”

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Horizontal piping 6" and smaller shall be supported by steel clevis or split ring malleable iron hangers with adjustable rods.

B. Hngers shall be spaced not more than 10'-0" apart; provide one additional hanger at each location where pipe changes direction.

C. Hangers for suspended piping shall be Grinnell, Fee and Mason or Gateway hangers each to the following Grinnell Figure Numbers. Hangers shall be Grinnell Fig. 108 split malleable iron pipe ring and Fig. 114 turnbuckle, for pipes 2" and smaller. Adjustment shall be 2" for securing proper grade and alignment.

D. For any copper pipe or tubing, provide copper coated steel hangers or lead liners for hangers or riser clamps supporting copper tubing (if any are in direct contact with the tubing) and insulate so as to prevent condensation. In no case, solder one line to another for support.

E. Supports for hangers shall be solid rods of ASTM A-107 steel with running threads on both end rods or shall be all-thread rods. Rods shall be sized according to the requirements of NFPA bulletins and shall be not less than the following:

SINGLE ROD

3/4" to 2" Pipe

3/8" Dia.

F. All rods shall be adjustable and shall be accurately plumbed and double nutted.





230529 - 3

G. Piping shall not be supported from ceiling or floor grid, ductwork, electric conduit, heating or plumbing lines, or any other utility lines, and vice versa. Each utility and the ceiling grid system shall be a separate installation and each shall be independently supported from the building structure. Where interferences occur, in order to support ductwork, piping, conduit, ceiling grid systems, etc., trapeze type hangers or supports shall be employed and shall not be located where they interfere with access to mixing boxes, fire dampers, valves, etc.

H. Hangers under new concrete construction shall be supported by concrete inserts, Grinnell Fig. 282, Fee and Mason or Gateway, malleable iron body and nut. Where additional supports are required, install, per manufacturer's installation instructions and load ratings (with 5:1 safety factor) Rawl or Hilti expansion bolts.

I. Hangers under existing concrete construction shall be supported by Rawl or Hilti expansion bolts installed per manufacturer's installation instructions and load ratings (with 5:1 safety factor) and placed horizontally in side of concrete joists where possible and installed in concrete slabs at other locations.

J. Adjacent to concrete and block construction, hangers shall be supported by Rawl or Hilti expansion bolts installed per manufacturer's installation instructions and load ratings (with 5:1 safety factor).

K. Under steel beam construction, hangers shall be supported by beam clamps, Grinnell Fig. 218, Fee and Mason, or Gateway malleable iron jaws with steel rod and nut. Where intermediate support between beams is required, contractor shall weld angle iron supports between beam or joists, top of angles being level with top of building steel.

L. Any cutting and patching required to install hangers, supports, rods, or inserts shall be performed by this contractor.

2.2 SUPPORTS - VERTICAL PIPING

A. Supports - vertical piping shall be supported at intermediate floors with Grinnell Fig. 261, Fee and Mason, or Gateway steel riser clamps placed under hub, fitting, or coupling, and with approved solid bearing on floor construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or





230529 - 4

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

E. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

G. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

H. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

K. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

High compressive-strength inserts may permit use of shorter shields or shields with less arc span. Edit first subparagraph and associated subparagraph below to suit Project.

3. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:





230529 - 5

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

4. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.





230529 - 6

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated hangers and attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.





IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

230553 - 1

SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Duct labels. 5. Stencils. 6. Valve tags. 7. Warning tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.





230553 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TAGGING

A. All new controlling valves shall be identified with numbered 2" diameter brass tags attached to valve wheels or stems with heavy brass chains. Tags shall have stamped letters, to designate piping system, and numbers, i.e., - heating H-1, chilled water CH-1, etc.

B. The contractor shall prepare a printed chart, designating the location and briefly stating the function of each valve so marked, properly classified and placed in numerical order. The chart shall also contain complete instructions for the operation of the circulating system and component parts. Copy of chart shall be submitted to the Engineer for proofreading and approval. Approved copy of chart and instructions to be mounted and set in frame under glass and hung in mechanical equipment room. Bind a copy with each set of instructions to be furnished under the General Conditions.

2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. The contractors shall include identification of all piping installed under their respective contracts, Such identification shall be in the form of pipe markers.

B. Underground piping shall not be identified.

C. Contents of piping shall be identified within 3 feet of each valve, or near each branch. All piping shall be identified along pipe runs at not more than 25 foot intervals where piping is concealed and 50 foot intervals where piping is exposed.

D. Pipe Identification shall comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and installed viewing angles of identification devices. Color coded bands (except as specified herein), fluid code and flow arrows shall be in accordance with ANSI 13.1 Standard.

E. Piping contents shall be labeled as follows:

Type of Service Color: Bands, Arrows & Designation

Lettering Drain Gray DR Heating Hot Water Supply Yellow-Red H.W.S. Heating Hot Water Return Yellow-Orange H.W.R. Supply Air - - SUPPLY Return Air - - RETURN General Exhaust - - EXHAUST Toilet Exhaust - - TOILET EXH. Outdoor Air - - OUTDOOR AIR

2.3 HVAC DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide plastic laminate or stenciled signs and arrows, in black or white (whichever provides





230553 - 3

most contrast with the ductwork color).

B. The following ductwork shall be identified:

1. Supply 2. Return 3. Exhaust 4. Intake

C. Location: Where ductwork is exposed, concealed by removable ceiling tiles, at duct origin, prior to concealed areas, and at 50 ft. intervals along exposed runs.

D. Access Doors: Provide stenciled or plastic laminate signs: including purpose and other appropriate maintenance, operating, safety and procedural information.

E. Concealed Doors: Provide stenciled or plastic signs.

F. Location of markers: Confirm with University.

G. Submit sample of all signage to the University and Engineer for approval.

2.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Contractors shall include identification of all equipment installed under their respective contracts.

B. Identification shall be on the form of a plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, in accordance with UC master equipment numbering scheme (APPA).

C. The following equipment shall be identified:

1. Control System Panels and Major Devices 2. Meters 3. Heaters 4. Motor driven units, such as: pumps, compressors, chillers, fans, blowers. 5. Major heat transfer equipment: heat exchangers, condensers, cooling towers, heat

recovery units and similar equipment. 6. HVAC air handling units and terminal units 7. Tanks and vessels. 8. Special components that may need regular maintenance or require awareness during

trouble-shooting functions. Submit sample to the University and Engineer for approval.

D. Submit sample to the University and Engineer for approval.





230553 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:





TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230593 - 1

SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Constant-flow hydronic systems. b. Variable-flow hydronic systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.





230593 - 2

D. Certified TAB reports.

E. Sample report forms.

F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration.


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by NEBB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by NEBB 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by NEBB as a

TAB technician.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with Architect, Construction Manager and Commissioning Authority on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report. b. The TAB plan. c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect, Construction Manager and Commissioning Authority.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.





230593 - 3

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

1.7 GENERAL

A. Provide equipment for testing, including necessary pumps, air compressors, hoses, gages, etc. Make necessary temporary connections to perform testing. Test piping systems before insulation and control devices are installed wherever feasible. Tests shall be performed before any work is concealed, covered, or painted.

B. Preliminary testing using air may be performed by the contractor to void delays in filling and draining of system for repairs. However, final test shall be hydrostatic unless specified otherwise.

C. A test fails if a leakage is observed or if the pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure over the duration of specified time.

D. Repair pipe or fittings which fail required test, by disassembly and reinstallation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.

E. After successful, final test, which must be witnessed by the Owner, Owner's Representative or Engineer, drain all water from system.

F. Hydrostatic tests shall be maintained for a minimum of eight (8) hours; air tests shall be maintained for a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours.

G. Water and Steam Systems All other hydronic piping shall be tested and made tight initially under air pressure and then under hydrostatic pressure each equal to 1-1/2 times the working pressure but in not case less than 125 PSI.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and





230593 - 4

assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums used for return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.

K. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

L. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

M. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.





230593 - 5

7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided.

8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."

B. If necessary, cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

D. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

E. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

F. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

G. Check for airflow blockages.

H. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

I. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."





230593 - 6

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.

4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.

6. Obtain approval from Architect, Construction Manager, and Commissioning Authority for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.





230593 - 7

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow. 3. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so

motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 4. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.

3. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.





230593 - 8

B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.

E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over

indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

G. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.

H. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.

3.8 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 5 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 5 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 5 percent.

3.9 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare weekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.





230593 - 9

3.10 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.





230593 - 10

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Balancing stations. 6. Position of balancing devices.

E. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).





230593 - 11

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). g. Number, make, and size of belts.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

F. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft. g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual air flow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm.. k. Barometric pressure in psig..

G. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model number and serial number. f. Water flow rate in gpm. g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig. i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches. k. Motor make and frame size.





230593 - 12

l. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type.

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Static head in feet of head or psig. b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig. c. Actual impeller size in inches. d. Full-open flow rate in gpm. e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig. g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Final water flow rate in gpm. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase.

3.11 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report.

2. Check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point. d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Construction Manager and Commissioning Authority.

2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Construction Manager and Commissioning Authority.

3. Architect, Construction Manager and Commissioning Authority shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."





230593 - 13

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.







230593 - 14

BLANK PAGE




HVAC INSULATION230700 - 1

SECTION 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials:

a. Glass Fiber. b. Foamed Plastic. c. Foam Glass d. Polyolefin.

2. Fire-rated insulation systems. 3. Insulating cements. 4. Adhesives. 5. Mastics. 6. Lagging adhesives. 7. Sealants. 8. Factory-applied jackets. 9. Field-applied cloths.


1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation." 2. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.





4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation.

5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels.

6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 8. Detail field application for each equipment type.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

B. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.





1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

1.8 APPLICATION OF INSULATION

A. No insulation shall be applied until pipe work has been tested for tightness and approved by the Engineer. In case insulation is damaged due to leaks in pipe work which has not been tested for tightness, this contractor shall remove all such damaged insulation and all additional insulation necessary to replace the defective pipe work. He shall then replace new insulation at his own expense after pipe work has been repaired.

B. All pipe insulation shall be installed continuous through floor, walls, partitions, and roof. In case pipe sleeves are not of sufficient size to permit the continuous application of insulation, the contractor for the piping installation will do all necessary cutting.

C. In case piping or ductwork is installed at an insufficient distance from walls, other pipe, ductwork, or other obstructions to permit application of full thickness of insulation, the contractor for the piping or ductwork installation will relocate piping to permit application of full thickness of insulation.

D. All hanger rods must be perpendicular to piping before pipe insulation is applied.

E. Where clevis hangers are installed outside insulation; provide 12" long section of foamglass insulation at each hanger the same thickness as the adjoining insulation; also refer to Section on Supports.

F. In applying insulation, the sections shall be butted tightly together to provide effective insulation and exclude air where condensation must be avoided.

G. Existing insulation cut or damaged in the course of the work under this contract shall be repaired in kind.

1.9 FIRE SAFETY

A. All insulation, jackets, tapes, vapor barriers, adhesives, etc. shall be fire-safe (flame spread rating of 25 or less, fuel contribution rating of 35 or less, and smoke developed rating of 50 or less). All adhesives used and required in the application of pipe covering and insulation shall be Benjamin Foster, or equal adhesives, applied per the manufacturer's recommendations for the specific application. All insulating materials, adhesives, jackets, etc. shall be of approved non-combustible or flame retardant type complying with the Local and State Basic Building Codes and N.F.P.A. Bulletin No. 90A.





1.10 FIRESTOPPING

A. All insulated piping which penetrates walls, floors, and/or roofs with a fire-resistive rating shall be insulated with molded foamglass "ASJ-SSL" covering, including a dual purpose fireproof, kraft aluminum foil laminated (white) jacket. Insulation shall be the same thickness as the adjoining insulation. Foamglass shall be installed and sealed as hereinafter specified.

1.11 INSULATION COVER

A. Lagging Cloth Cover: Exposed pipe and duct insulation inside the building shall be finished with a rewettable glass lagging cloth fabric 14.3 oz. per square yard applied over vapor barrier jacket, tightly stretched and pasted on with Benjamin Foster, or equal fire-safe adhesive, or equal cement. Seams in jacket shall be made on top of pipes or toward the wall in such a manner as to make them as inconspicuous as possible. The covering and jacket adjacent to flanges shall be applied in such a manner as to give access for wrenches on bolt heads and nuts when plastic covering is removed. Covering in shafts and covering above suspended ceilings will NOT be considered exposed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

2.2 DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. The contract shall include all items of labor and materials required for the complete installation of the duct insulation work as shown on accompanying drawings and hereinafter specified. The following ducts shall be insulated (except ducts with sound insulation as hereinafter specified):

1. All new conditioned supply air ducts. 2. All new conditioned return air ducts. 3. All new exhaust air ducts from automatic (control) damper to exhaust opening.

B. Thermal Insulation For All Exposed Ducts





1. Glass Fiber Duct Insulation

a. Rectangular Ducts: All rectangular insulated ducts shall be insulated on the outside with Johns-Manville Type 815FF, Owens Corning, Certainteed, or Knauf, 1-1/2" rigid, 3 lb. density fiberglass board, tightly secured with sheet metal washers and screws or weld pins 12" to 18" on centers. On cold ducts, all joints shall be sealed with 3" wide vaporsealing tape.

b. Round Ducts: All round duct shall be insulated on the outside with Johns-Manville "Micro-Lok", Owens Corning ASJ, Knauf, Certainteed, or equal, 1-1/2" thick fiberglass insulation in one piece molded sections with foil kraft universal fire-resistive and vaporseal jacket. Insulation shall be applied with kraft foil vapor barrier jacket. The longitudinal seams shall be held together tightly by stapling the jacket overlaps with outward-clinch staples 3" on center; the overlap shall be coated with a vapor barrier adhesive before stapling. End joints shall be tightly butted and covered with factory furnished vapor barrier tapes, heavily coated with vapor barrier adhesive, the ends of the tape overlapped and held securely with outward-clinch staples. Staples to be coated with vapor barrier adhesive. Ends of insulation shall be sealed off with vapor barrier adhesive or mastic. All fittings shall be insulated with fabricated mitered segments of the same fiberglass insulation with joints butted firmly together and sealed with 3" wide vapor sealing tape.

c. Jacket: Refer to Section 23 07 00, Paragraph 1.11.

C. Thermal Insulation for all Concealed Ducts (Exterior of Ductwork)

1. Glass Fiber Duct Insulation

a. All concealed insulated ducts in vertical shafts, crawl spaces, and/or above suspended ceilings shall be insulated with 1-1/2" thick, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass blanket insulation with aluminum foil skrim kraft vaporseal on the outside and with all joints taped with vapor barrier plastic tape.

D. Sound Insulation

1. Where shown, as hereinbefore specified, and as detailed on the drawings, ducts shall be sound insulated on inside with 1" thick, non-combustible AP Armaflex SA self-adhering close-cell elastomeric sheet. The sections shall be butted tightly together to provide effective insulation and to prevent condensation. Should condensation appear on ductwork with internal lining, the contractor shall repair or replace insulation or shall provide external duct insulation conforming with Paragraphs 2 and/or 3. For lined ducts, dimensions of duct shown on drawing is dimension inside sound lining

2.3 PIPING INSULATION

A. General

1. The contract shall include all items of labor and materials required for the complete installation of the pipe insulation work as shown on accompanying drawings and hereinafter specified, including the following principal items:





a. Piping from humidifier to ultra-sorb steam injection tube. b. All new hot water (heating) flow and return piping. c. All new chilled water supply and return piping except within new Air Conditioning

Units where piping is above drain pan. d. All new mechanical system cold water piping installed. e. Existing pipe insulation cut or damaged in the course of the work under this

contract.

2. Fittings: Fittings, flanges, etc. shall be insulated with fabricated mitered segments of insulation equal in thickness to the insulation on adjoining pipe. Fittings 3" and smaller may be insulated with insulating cement of equal thickness. Insulation on fittings shall be cement smooth. Expansion joints shall be wrapped with glass blanket compacted to the thickness of the adjoining pipe, wired in place with No. 20 gauge copper wire, and triple wrapped with 2" wide polyvinyl tape. Insulation on fittings shall be cement smooth.

3. Valves, Strainers, etc. shall be insulated with a removable insulating cover consisting of a fibrous insulation material encased in a silicone integrated fiberglass cloth cover with stainless steel lacing hooks. Blanket shall be double sewn lock stitch with cloth binding. Blanket overlap shall be 2" minimum. A stainless steel identification plate shall be riveted to each blanket piece.

4. Jackets: Refer to Section 23 07 00, Paragraph 1.11.

B. Insulation Of Hot Water (Heating) Piping And Humidifier Piping

1. Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation:

a. Pipe: Insulation shall be Johns-Manville "Micro-Lok", Owens Corning ASJ, Knauf, Certainteed, or equal, 1-1/2" thick fiberglass insulation in one piece molded sections with foil kraft universal fire-resistive and vaporseal white jacket. End joints shall be tightly butted and all joints shall be lapped and neatly stapled 3" on centers.

b. Fittings: All fittings shall be insulated with preformed sectional rigid fiberglass units, mechanically secured and spiral wrapped with cloth tape with white exterior surface; all valve bodies, etc. shall be insulated with a textile type glass fiber blanket insulation wrapped firmly under compression (2 to 1 minimum) to the thickness of the adjoining insulation and held in place with spiral windings of cloth tape. The blanket shall then be wrapped with an open mesh cloth or glass fabric tape. Exposed fittings insulated with blanket insulation shall have an additional layer of insulating cement troweled smooth.

c. Jackets: Refer to Section 23 07 00, Paragraph 1.11.

C. Insulation Of Insulated Piping At Fire Resistive Walls And Floors

1. All insulated piping which penetrates walls and floors with a fire-resistive rating shall be insulated as follows:

a. Foam Glass Pipe Insulation:

1) Insulation shall be molded foamglass Pittsburgh Corning "ASJ-SSL" covering, including a dual purpose fireproof, kraft aluminum foil laminated (white) jacket. Insulation for insulated piping penetrating walls and floors





with fire resistive rating shall be the same thickness as the adjoining insulation.

2) Adjoining sections shall be butted firmly together and the longitudinal lap of the vapor barrier jacket shall be sealed with the white flamesafe vapor barrier lap cement. End joints shall be sealed with factory-furnished 3" vapor barrier strips applied with flamesafe lap cement. Bands shall be applied over edges of joint seal strips and at center of each section of insulation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.





E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.





O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.





1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division

07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for





above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

3.6 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.

B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.

C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."






BLANK PAGE




COMMISSIONING OF HVAC230800 - 1

SECTION 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes commissioning process requirements for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, and equipment.


1.3 DEFINITIONS



C. HVAC&R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration.

D. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.





D. Participate in HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.








A. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for actual HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be furnished and installed as part of the construction contract.








3. Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's prestart and startup checklists for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be verified and tested.


5. Certificate of readiness certifying that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing.


1.7 SUBMITTALS








PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Certify that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents.

B. Certify that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded.









C. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of HVAC&R systems at the direction of the CxA.











B. Scope of HVAC&R testing shall include entire HVAC&R installation.


D. The CxA along with the HVAC&R Contractor, testing and balancing Subcontractor, and HVAC&R Contractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment.





I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC&R system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.


3.4 HVAC&R SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES

A. HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Field testing plans and testing requirements are specified in Division 25. Assist the CxA with preparation of testing plans.

B. Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment requirements are specified in Division 23 piping Sections. HVAC&R Contractor shall prepare a pipe system cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Provide cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating plan and final reports to the CxA. Plan shall include the following:

1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested, identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to Drawings for





each pipe sector, showing the physical location of each designated pipe test section. Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment plan.

2. Description of equipment for flushing operations. 3. Minimum flushing water velocity. 4. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been cleaned,

flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated.

C. Energy Supply System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of hot water system and equipment at the direction of the CxA. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested.

D. HVAC&R Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of air and hydronic distribution systems; special exhaust; and other distribution systems, including HVAC&R terminal equipment and unitary equipment.

E. Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of vibration isolation.






BLANK PAGE



Project:

Date: Building:

Location:





Start-Up Plan


Checklists



TAB

Start-Up Witness

Test Procedure

Other Retest

Other Training


Approval Dates




Start-Up Plan


Checklists



TAB

Start-Up Witness

Test Procedure





Date:

Building:

Location:











with the equipment.



Agenda.


















Comments:

Training Methods.






Written handouts

Classroom lecture


Video presentation


Comments:




PIPING MATERIALS232111 - 1

SECTION 23 21 11 PIPING MATERIALS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes a summary of all Piping Materials related work:


1. 23 21 13 – HYDRONIC PIPING

1.3 HOT WATER PIPING

A. 3" and Larger.

1. Pipe: Standard, A-53 black steel. 2. Fittings: Standard, butt-weld.

B. 2-1/2" and Smaller.

1. Pipe: Type "L" copper tubing, hard temper. 2. Fittings: Solder end, cast red brass or wrought copper.

1.4 DRAIN PIPING

A. Copper Piping.

1. Pipe: Type "L" copper tubing, hard temper. 2. Fittings: Solder end, cast red brass or wrought copper.

B. Steel Piping.

1. Pipe: Standard, A-53 black steel. 2. Fittings: Threaded 150# black malleable iron or 125# black cast iron.




PIPING MATERIALS232111 - 2

PART 2 - – PRODUCTS – (NOT USED)

PART 3 - – EXECUTION – (NOT USED)





HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM232112 - 1

SECTION 23 21 12 HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

A. This contractor shall extend hot water supply and return piping to new radiant heating systems.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. New Radiant Heat Hydronic Piping: Refer to Section 23 83 16.

B. Radiant Mixing Block: Refer to Section 23 83 23.

1.4 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Furnish and install the valves and specialties as indicated on the drawing.

B. In other branch piping at high points of the system: 1/8" manual air vent cocks.

C. In the mains at high point of system: Anderson, Crane, Fischer, 1/2" automatic air vent traps with cast iron body and bronze float and valve mechanism, and with discharge piped to floor drain.

D. At all low points of piping: A drain valve with hose fitting capped.

1.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Furnish and install the following valves and specialties:

1. At new radiant mixing blocks:

a. At inlet: A ball valve and strainer. b. At outlet: A ball valve, balancing valve, and drain valves.

1.6 INSTRUMENTS

A. Furnish and install the following instruments:




HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM232112 - 2

1. In the piping, 1/2" pressure-temperature test plugs at the following locations for use with gauges and thermometers.

2. At inlet and outlet of each radiant mixing block.

PART 2 - – PRODUCTS – (NOT USED)

PART 3 - – EXECUTION (NOT USED)





HYDRONIC PIPING232113 - 1

SECTION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following:

1. Hot-water heating piping. 2. Drain piping.


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding minimum working pressure and temperature specified herein:

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cement. 2. Pressure-seal fittings. 3. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for

calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves. 4. Air control devices. 5. Chemical treatment. 6. Hydronic specialties.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Field quality-control test reports.





F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressure-seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe couplings and fittings.

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. All work, whether shown on the drawings or specified, shall be installed in an approved manner to meet the structural and architectural conditions and to avoid interference insofar as possible with the work of other Mechanical or Electrical Contractors, all subject to the approval of the Engineer. Special care shall be taken in the arrangement of piping to secure a neat and workmanlike appearance and true alignment and grade. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before erection, removing all scale, burrs, fins, and obstruction. All pipe shall be thoroughly reamed, and ample provision must be made to allow for expansion of piping without undue strain. All piping shall be sloped approximately 1" in 30'-0" to eliminate air and facilitate drainage.

2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. All pipe and fittings shall be of the best of their respective kinds as hereinafter specified and shall at all times meet the approval of the Engineer.

B. Where certain pipe is mentioned hereinafter in any part of the specification, such pipe shall conform to the requirements of the designated pipe under this title "Pipe and Fittings".





C. Standard specifications hereinafter referred to as "ASTM" are the specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials, together with existing addenda thereto. All references shall include subsequent revisions of said specifications.

D. All pipe shall be subjected at the manufacturer's works to a hydrostatic pressure test and only pipe which is tight and undistorted when subjected to such a test shall be used. All threaded pipe shall be delivered with couplings or sleeve pieces to protect threads from damage.

2.3 COPPER PIPE

A. Copper Tubing and Fittings shall be Anaconda, Chase, Mueller, Revere, or equal, Type K or Type L as hereinafter specified, 99.9% pure copper tubing complying with ASTM Specification B-88, Type K or Type L. All tubing shall be hard temper. All fittings in copper tubing shall be Mueller Brass Co., or equal, cast red brass fittings, containing not less than 85% copper, with soldered ends, or wrought copper fittings with soldered ends, and designed for 150 PSI (steam) and 300 PSI (water) pressure. All soldered joints shall be wiped smooth. 2-1/2" and larger flanged copper fittings shall be used at equipment and valves. All joints and fittings shall comply with the latest edition of ASME Code for Pressure Piping.

B. Drain Piping: Fittings in copper, drain, waste, and vent lines shall be cast or wrought D.W.V. copper fittings with soldered ends. All joints shall be soldered in accordance with the recommendations and standards of the manufacturer for not less than 150 PSI and 250 service, using lead free nickel solder.

C. Water Piping: All soldered joints shall be soldered for 150 PSI, 250 service, in accordance with the recommendations and standards of the manufacturer, using approved lead-free nickel silver solder.

2.4 BLACK STEEL PIPE

A. Black Steel Pipe shall be scale free steel pipe of soft weldable steel, of uniform quality, and manufactured in accordance with ASTM Standard Specification; 1-1/2" and smaller pipe shall be butt-welded steel pipe Serial Designation A-53; larger pipe shall be seamless steel or electric resistance welded steel pipe Serial Designation A-53, Grade B. Where hereinbefore specifically specified or indicated, pipe shall be ASA Schedule 80; pipe 12" and larger shall have 0.500" wall thickness. All other piping shall be as follows: pipe 10" nominal and smaller in size shall be ASA Schedule 40; pipe 12" and larger shall have 0.375" wall thickness. Nipples and couplings shall be same composition and weight. The manufacturer's mark and date shall be plainly embossed on each mill length and nipple. All joints and fittings shall comply with latest edition of ASME Code for Pressure Piping.

B. Threaded Pipe: Threads shall be accurately cut; all screwed joints shall be made tight with red lead and oil compound or Teflon tape applied to male threads only, and all pipe shall be reamed. Screwed fittings shall be of Crane, Grinnell, Walworth, or equal make, with perfect taper right hand threads, with heavy bead, smooth inside and out, and new. Where changes in pipe sizes occur in horizontal lines, eccentric fittings shall be used. Screwed couplings shall be same make as pipe and shall be of standard length and thickness for weight of pipe used. Threads shall all be right hand. Screwed fittings shall have the following pressure ratings:





PRESSURE RATINGS

SATURATED STEAM

Cast Iron Class 125

125 PSI

Malleable Iron Class 150

150 PSI

300 PSI

C. Buttweld Pipe joints shall be single vee, butt type, fabricated by the fusion welding oxy-acetylene or electric welding process using high test welding rod or by semi-automatic metal arc welding machines using micro-wire in accordance with Procedure No. 25 of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. All welding shall be done by properly certified and competent welders in a thorough and workmanlike manner and shall be fabricated in accordance with the ASME and Heating and Piping Contractors National Association Welding Specifications. Note: Extra precautions shall be taken to control fire hazards during welding and to protect adjoining surfaces, glass, etc. from hot sparks or similar damage. Bends, 90 ells, etc. shall be made with Tube Turns, Crane, Grinnell, or equal, welding fittings of the same material as the pipe. Branches in straight pipe shall be made with welding tees of same make and specification as elbows, except branches one-fourth the size of the main and less may be made with welding neck flanges or Weld-O-Let, or equal fittings; approved Thread-O-Let fittings may be used for small pipes where specified with screwed joints. Elbows shall be of long radius pattern. The use of elbows and fittings fabricated by welders at the site or the use of couplings for branch connections will not be permitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS


3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.

B. Install throttling-duty valves at each branch connection to return main.

C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.

D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.

F. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.





3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.





S. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."



3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION





E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:



F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only. Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.

C. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank.

D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger.

E. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4





bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections. Install NPS ¾ pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and include a full-size, full-port, ball valve.

F. Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank.

1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose. 2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of

tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building components and structural members.

G. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.

3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to





pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,

cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.





HVAC WATER TREATMENT232500 - 1

SECTION 23 25 00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following HVAC water-treatment systems:

1. HVAC water-treatment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CHEMICAL TREATMENT – HOT WATER SYSTEM

A. After hot water systems have been thoroughly flushed and cleaned, contractor shall fill system with treated water from the Campus hot water mains under direct supervision of Miami University Physical Plant personnel..





HVAC WATER TREATMENT232500 - 2

BLANK PAGE




METAL DUCTS233113 - 1

SECTION 23 31 13METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Duct liner. 5. Sealants and gaskets. 6. Hangers and supports.


1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible".

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.





2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, and vibration

isolation.

C. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings. g. AV/IT Equipment.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."

B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECTANGULAR LOW PRESSURE SUPPLY DUCTS AND ALL RETURN AND EXHAUST DUCTS

A. Rectangular low pressure supply ducts including ducts on discharge of terminal units, and all return and exhaust ducts shall be fabricated from AK Steel, or equal, galvanized iron or steel sheets. Ducts shall conform with all SMACNA Duct Construction Standards for Gauge and Reinforcement for 2" pressure class or ducts shall conform with the following:

1. Duct Wall Thickness: Width in Inches U. S. Gauge

30" and smaller No. 24

2. Joints: All longitudinal corner seams shall be double lock seams, hammered flat. Transverse seams shall be double lock seams, with sliding clips, hammered flat on all ducts up to 24" wide. Ducts 25" to 40" in width shall have 1" standing seams, spaced not to exceed 7'-0" on centers. All ducts 41" to 60" in width shall have 1-1/2" standing seams, spaced not to exceed 3'-9" on centers. All ducts 61" to 84" in width shall have 1-1/2" x 1/8" bar spaced not to exceed 3'-9" on centers. All ducts 85" and larger in width shall have 2" x 2" x 1/4" companion angles with 1/2" vanstone fastened with 1/4" rivets 8" on centers. Transverse joints may be made using Lockformer TDC, Nexus, or Ductmate flanges installed per manufacturer's instructions and with additional application of approved duct sealer in each corner. All four panels in ducts 18" and larger in any dimension shall be cross-broken or ducts shall be two gauges heavier. All joints shall be reasonably tight and, if defective, shall be made good by the contractor.

3. Stiffeners: All ducts 25" to 42" in width shall be stiffened with 1" x 3/16" angles 4 feet from joint; all ducts larger than 43" in width shall be stiffened with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16" angle irons spaced 2 feet from joint. All angles shall encircle the ducts and shall be fastened with 1/4" rivets, 8" on centers.

B. Elbows and Duct Turns: All elbows shall be radius type, constructed with proper radii and splitters to produce a pressure loss of not more than 17% of the velocity pressure in ducts 11" and smaller and not more than 12-1/2% in ducts 12" and larger. Elbows shall, in general, conform to the following schedule:

Number of Inside Radius of Radius of Radius of

Width of Duct Splitters Radius 1st Splitter 2nd Splitter 3rd Splitter

R R1 R2 R3

5" to 11" None 1-1/4W ------ ------ ----- 12" to 26" 1 1/2W 1.73 R ------ ------





27" to 39" 2 1/3W 1.59 R 2.52 R ------ 40" to 60" 3 1/4W 1.50 R 2.24 R 3.36 R 61" and larger 3 1/6W 1.63 R 2.66 R 4.32 R

2.2 ROUND DUCTS

A. Round ducts shall be United Sheet Metal, Semco, or equal, galvanized steel spiral ducts and shall conform to the following schedule:

Diameter 8" and smaller 9" to 14"

No. 24

B. Fittings shall be formed and continuously welded from 20 gauge galvanized steel. Elbows shall be of five-piece pattern except elbows 8" and smaller shall be United uniform die stamped, or gored elbows. Tees and crosses shall be of the flared conical entrance type. Outside dimension of fittings shall be slightly smaller than inside dimensions of companion duct size.

C. Joints: Duct sections shall be connected together using a sleeve type male coupling slipped into the duct sections. Duct to fitting connections shall be made by slipping fitting into duct. Fitting to fitting connections shall be made using sleeve type female coupling slipped over fittings. All joints shall be secured with sheet metal screws or pop rivets, sealed with approved duct sealer, and taped with polyvinyl tape while sealer is wet.

2.3 STAINLESS STEEL DUCTS

A. Where indicated on the drawings, within 18" of outdoor air and exhaust air louvers, ducts shall be constructed of 304-2B stainless steel with mill finish and shall conform to the following schedule:

Width in Inches U. S. Gauge

Up to 30" No. 26

B. Joints: All joints and seams shall be continuously soldered with stainless steel solder and made watertight. Longitudinal seams shall be on top side of horizontal ducts.

2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Round ducts to air outlets shall include a minimum 1'-0" long section of flexible duct. In areas where insulated ductwork is specified, flexible ducts shall be Clevepak Corp. Cleveflex Type 12FV, Thermaflex M-KC, United, Wiremold, or equal insulated flexible tubing. All other flexible ducts shall be Clevepak Corp. "Cleveflex" Type 12, Thermaflex S-TL, United, Wiremold, or equal, flexible tubing. Tubing shall be flame-resistant and shall comply with the latest requirements of NFPA Bulletin No. 90A.





B. Joints: All joints shall be secured with adjustable clamp or metal strap with sheet metal screw, sealed with approved duct sealer, and taped with polyvinyl tape while sealer is wet.

2.5 SPECIAL WORK

A. Where necessary, sheet metal work shall be specially built to suit structural conditions, as where beams or other steel passes through ducts, offsets are necessary to avoid work of other trades, to avoid other ducts, to provide proper head room, or to install the ducts in the space available. Such special work shall be part of the contract and shall be done without extra cost to the Owner.

2.6 SUPPORTS

A. All horizontal rectangular and round ducts up to 25" in width shall be supported on not more than 7'-0" centers by means of pairs of 1/4" rod or 1/8" x 1" band hangers attached to a horizontal angle on the bottom of the duct. All other rectangular ducts 25" to 47" in width shall be supported on not more than 4'-0" intervals from 1/4" diameter rods attached to the stiffening angles hereinbefore specified.

B. Under concrete construction, hangers shall be supported by Rawl, Hilti, or approved equal expansion bolts installed per manufacturer's installation instructions and load ratings (with 5:1 safety factor) and placed horizontally in side of concrete fire proofing where possible and installed in concrete slabs at other locations.

C. Adjacent to concrete and block construction, hangers shall be supported by Rawl or Hilti expansion bolts installed per manufacturer's installation instructions and load ratings (with 5:1 safety factor).

D. Under bar joist construction, hangers shall be supported by beam clamps, Grinnell Fig. 218, Fee and Mason, or Gateway malleable iron jaws with steel rod and nut. Where intermediate support between beams is required, contractor shall weld angle iron supports between beam or bar joists, top of angles being level with top of building steel.

E. Under steel beam construction, hangers shall be supported by beam clamps, Grinnell Fig. 218, Fee and Mason, or Gateway malleable iron jaws with steel rod and nut. Where intermediate support between beams is required, contractor shall weld angle iron supports between beam or joists, top of angles being level with top of building steel.

F. Ductwork shall not be supported from ceiling grid, raised floor, electrical conduit, heating or plumbing lines, or any other utility lines, and vice versa. Each utility and the raised floor system shall be a separate installation and each shall be independently supported from the building structure - concrete, steel, or masonry. Where interferences occur, in order to support ductwork, piping, conduit, ceiling grid systems, etc., trapeze type hangers or supports shall be employed and shall not be located where they interfere with access to fire dampers, valves, etc.

G. All vertical ducts shall be supported on each floor level by means of the angle iron stiffeners and at intermediate points where required for rigidity.

H. Hangers used on ducts shall be galvanized iron hangers of approved type.





I. Hangers and supports shall support and brace the ducts in such a manner that the ducts will be absolutely rigid.

J. Ductwork shall be free from vibration when the systems are in operation and any ductwork having excessive vibration shall be provided with additional supports or braces at no extra cost.

K. Any cutting and patching required to install hanger supports shall be performed by this contractor. Patching work shall match and shall be integral with surrounding surfaces.

2.7 SIZES AND SHAPES

A. Dimensions of the ducts shown on the plans shall not be considered as absolute, but any change from same shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

B. Where, on account of obstructions, or for other reasons, it is necessary to change the shape of the ducts shown, equivalent areas shall be maintained. In no case, however, shall areas be reduced without special permission of the Engineer.

2.8 HOLES FOR DUCTS

A. The General Contractor will provide all duct openings in new wall construction including lintels; the Ventilating and Air Handling Contractor shall cooperate with General Contractor in locating openings; and Ventilating and Air Handling Contractor shall provide required frames, and the General Contractor will set and close up around same. All holes for ductwork shall be sealed airtight to duct to maintain integrity of ceiling or floor plenum.

B. Unless otherwise noted, the Ventilating and Air Handling Contractor shall cut, frame, and patch all openings for ducts in existing wall and floor construction, and shall close any openings in walls and floors, resulting from removal of ducts and/or grilles. Patching work shall match and shall be integral with existing surrounding surfaces. All holes for ductwork shall be sealed airtight to duct to maintain integrity of ceiling or floor plenum.

C. In fire rated walls, space between bare ductwork or insulation and hole shall be filled with the following applicable 3M Branch fire barrier products: Model CP25N/S no-sag caulk, moldable putty, Model FS-195 wrap/strip or Model CS-195 composite sheet. Seal must be airtight.

2.9 LINTELS AND SLEEVES

A. This contractor shall provide suitable wall frames for all new wall openings for ducts and fire dampers in existing walls, and General Contractor will set and brick up and patch around same. Thoroughly caulk any void between duct and opening through which duct and/or sleeve passes so as to make airtight and waterproof with fire-resistive rating equal to or greater than the construction penetrated. Provide sheet plates on both sides of wall covering opening.

B. General Contractor will provide all lintels in new wall construction.





C. Where this contractor provides openings in masonry walls, he shall provide lintels for openings greater than 15" wide; lintels shall be 12" longer than opening to provide 6" bearing on each side, and shall be of the following sizes: For 16" to 36" opening, 4" x 3" x 1/4".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."





3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class B. 4. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 6. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class C. 7. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal

Class B. 8. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.





3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m).

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.



B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test.

2. Test the following systems:

a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Test representative duct sections, selected by Architect from sections installed, totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.

4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.





C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according

to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.7 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

D. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.





3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if

fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

3.8 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."






BLANK PAGE




AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES233300 - 1

SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Access Doors. 2. Access Panels. 3. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 4. Manual volume dampers. 5. Combination fire and smoke dampers.


1. Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for duct-mounted fire and smoke detectors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control damper installations. d. Fire-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling, and corridor damper

installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors and remote damper operators.

e. Duct security bars. f. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.





C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for concealed ducts finish for exposed ducts.

D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 ACCESS PANELS

A. Where equipment requiring operation or maintenance occurs in inaccessible locations, such as





above unaccessible suspended ceilings, behind walls, etc., access panels shall be provided. Where access panels are not indicated on architectural drawings, this contractor shall furnish and install flush metal access panels with frames of ample size for removal or repair of such equipment. Where removable ceiling panels occur, access panels will not be required.

B. Access doors shall be Milcor, or equal, of the following types: in plaster walls: Style DW; in masonry walls: Style M; in plaster and drywall ceilings: Style AP; in inaccessible acoustical ceilings: Style AT. Doors in fire rated walls shall have a fire rating equal to or greater than the wall.

2.3 BALANCED BACKDRAFT DAMPER

A. Furnish and install a new balanced backdraft damper where specifically indicated on the drawings and herein specified. Damper frame shall be extruded aluminum with a wall thickness of .090". Damper blades shall also be extruded aluminum with a wall thickness of .050" and equipped with a vinyl blade edge seal.

B. Balanced backdraft dampers shall be Ruskin Model No. BD2A1, Prefco, Air Balance, Louvers and Dampers, or approved equal.

2.4 DAMPERS

A. A volume damper shall be provided in each main low pressure duct before any branches are taken off and in each main branch and in each individual connection to a supply or exhaust air opening. Dampers in individual branches shall be back of grilles. Where registers are shown or specified at air openings they shall take the place of the volume damper. Volume dampers back of grilles shall be held in place by a friction device and they shall be arranged for adjustment from inside the room without removing the grille. All other volume dampers shall be provided with approved indicating and locking devices located in accessible places.

2.5 SMOKE AND/OR FIRE DAMPERS

A. Furnish and install all smoke and/or fire dampers as shown on the drawings and required by Bulletin No. 90A and No. 101 of the Regulations of the National Fire Protection Association and National Board of Fire Underwriters. Approved fire dampers shall be installed at all points where ducts pass through masonry shaft construction and fire walls; or at structural floors if ducts are exposed. Approved combination smoke and fire dampers shall be installed at points where ducts pass through smoke barrier walls. All dampers at these locations shall be constructed and installed to provide the same hourly fire rating as the construction. Special attention shall be given to the method of mounting the dampers; dampers shall be installed in accordance with SMACNA standards so they will remain in place even though the ducts are melted away by fire. Clear openings through dampers shall be not less than the size of duct to which damper is connected. Provide access doors near each damper. The contractor shall submit drawings to the Engineer showing the location and construction of all smoke and/or fire dampers.





B. Fire dampers shall be Air Balance, Airstream Products, Ruskin, Prefco, Safe Air, Louvers & Dampers, or equal, Underwriters Labelled fire dampers of required size; such dampers shall be built into the construction as hereinbefore specified.

C. Combination smoke and fire dampers shall be Ruskin Model FSD-60 and Model FSDR25 or equal, Underwriters Labelled combination smoke and fire dampers each equipped with a fusible link which shall melt at 212 F. causing damper to close and lock in a closed position. Damper shall also be complete with Ruskin M693 or 331-2961, UL555S, pneumatic two-position, factory installed operator, sleeve mounted on exterior of damper assembly outside air stream. Operator shall close damper upon power failure or when actuated by remote mounted smoke detection device furnished by Electric Contractor. Damper shall be capable of being tested or reset after response to smoke or fire, from a remote location.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.

H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment.

2. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure





relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

3. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. 4. Upstream and downstream from turning vanes. 5. Control devices requiring inspection. 6. Elsewhere as indicated.

I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

J. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

K. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

L. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

M. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.

N. Connect diffusers with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

O. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.

P. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed. 3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of

movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. 5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and

damper.






BLANK PAGE




CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS233416 - 1

SECTION 23 34 16 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backward-inclined centrifugal fans.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan performance ratings on actual Project site elevations above sea level.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic

restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.

C. Coordination Drawings: Show fan room layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and





weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA 1.


A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL VENTILATING FANS

A. Furnish and install in-line centrifugal fans with heavy gauge galvanized steel housing, with removable access panels, providing straight through in-line air flow and fitted with square inlet and outlet duct collars, supports for fan and motor, inlet cone, aluminum backwardly inclined blades, statically and dynamically balanced. Bearings shall be selected for minimum L5 life, in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. Motors shall be 60 hertz, A.C.





motor as hereinafter scheduled; also refer to Auxiliary Equipment, Paragraph 12. Fans shall be Greenheck Model SQ, Twin City, Aerovent, or approved equal.

B. Schedule of In-Line Centrifugal Fan: Refer to Drawings.

2.2 ROOF EXHAUST FANS

A. Furnish and install on prefabricated curbs on roof, where shown, centrifugal belt driven exhaust fans consisting of a weathertight, heavy gauge aluminum fan housing, support on a rigid support structure, aluminum centrifugal high performance fan, statically and dynamically balanced, and driven by an A.C. motor.

B. Motor and drive shall be isolated from the exhaust airstream. A disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to the disconnect junction box. A conduit chase shall be provided for running electrical wiring through the curb cap into the power compartment.

C. At each fan locations, furnish and install Model A-T-S Sound Curb or GPI Roof Curb of surface mounted type. Curb body shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum. Rigid fiber glass board of six pound density shall be provided for insulation and sound absorption around the interior curb wall. Wooden nailer shall be securely attached to the curb housing. Roof curb shall be 14” high.

D. Bids shall be based on Greenheck G Series fans each with Model No. GPI curb, Briedert, Ilg, Carnes, or Penn fans.

E. Schedule of Roof Exhaust Fans: Refer to drawings.

2.3 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT

A. Fan Motors: Furnish and install all driving motors for new fans. Generally, all motors shall be ball bearing, of squirrel cage induction type, and wound for 460 or 200 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz current; certain motors shall be wound for 115 volt, single phase, 60 hertz; all built in accordance with NEMA standards for 40 C. ambient motors. Each fan motor must be capable of driving the fan to which it is connected for a period of eight hours continuous run, with a rise in temperature of winding and core not exceeding NEMA limits of temperature rise above the temperature of the surrounding atmosphere. Motors shall be open drip proof, high efficiency. Motors shall be General Electric, Louis Allis, Siemens-Allis, U. S. Motor, Marathon, or Reliance-Westinghouse, and belt driven fans shall be mounted on sliding bases.

B. Machine Bases: Each new centrifugal fan and its driving motor shall be mounted on a common welded steel angle iron or channel base, the depth of which shall be not less than 1/12 of the longest dimension between support points. Base for fans shall be equipped with spring type vibration isolators arranged for and including seismic 2 snubbers; isolators for fans driven at more than 500 RPM by 20 h.p. and smaller motors shall have a minimum static deflection of 1.75"; isolators for all other fans shall have a minimum static deflection of 2.5". Bids shall be based on isolators of Amber Booth; substitute bids may be submitted on isolators of Kinetics, Korfund, Mason Industries, Vibration Eliminator Co., Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.,





or equal manufacture. All isolators shall be properly proportioned for the load. All centrifugal fans shall be mounted on concrete base provided by the HVAC Contractor.

C. Flexible Connections: Where suction or discharge of each fan is connected to new galvanized iron ducts or casings, provide an airtight Vent-fab connection to prevent vibration from being transmitted to ductwork. Connection shall be not less than 6" long and shall be securely fastened to fan and ductwork, and shall be airtight.

D. Motor Controllers: Unless otherwise excepted herein, all other motor controllers will be furnished by the Electrical Contractor.

E. Lubricating Fittings: Lubricating fittings of approved type shall be provided on all bearings.

F. Curbs and Bases: At new air handling units, HVAC Contractor will construct new curbs and bases. At casings, fans, motors, air filters, coils, etc., the HVAC Contractor shall form and pour a concrete foundation with chamfered edges of the height shown and 3" larger in plan than the equipment base. This contractor shall provide and set requisite anchor bolts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb.

B. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stops having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.








A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing,

adjusting, and balancing procedures. 10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."






BLANK PAGE




DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES233713 - 1

SECTION 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Square ceiling diffusers. 2. Adjustable bar registers and grilles. 3. Fixed face registers and grilles.


1. Division 08 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.

2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.

C. Samples for Verification: For diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizes to verify color selected.

D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.





4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

5. Duct access panels.

E. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Hart & Cooley Inc. b. Price Industries. c. Titus. d. Tuttle & Bailey.

2.2 DIFFUSERS

A. All ceiling supply outlets, designated "S---", shall be adjustable ceiling outlets suitable for flush mounting in exposed tee or drywall ceiling and shall be a square panel type with horizontal air pattern and of the capacities shown on the drawings. All 12" x 12" and 24" x 24" outlets shall be Titus Architectural Ceiling Diffusers "Omni" Model with round duct collar, Type 3 for Lay-In or with plaster frame for service mounting (Titus TRM). The diffuser shall have a steel face panel that captures a secondary steel panel. The exposed surface shall be smooth, flat and free of visible fasteners. No spot welds or other direct attachments to the face plate are acceptable. Exposed metal parts shall be finished in white No. 26 baked enamel. Certain diffusers, as indicated on the drawings, shall be equipped with an internal fire damper.

B. All ceiling return, vent, or exhaust outlets, designated "R or E---", shall be similar to "S---" and of the capacities shown on the drawings; Titus "Omni" Model.

2.3 REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A. All wall and duct mounted supply grilles, designated "SG---", shall be Titus "Aero-Blade" Series, Model 271RS, or equal, heavy gauge aluminum blades with aluminum border, high capacity, industrial type, single deflection grilles, with 3/4" deep extruded aluminum bars spaced 3/4" on center; vertical bars in front; complete with optional, opposed multi-blade locking volume control shutter at rear; grilles shall be 3-7/8" deep for surface mounting on duct with gaskets and drilled holes and mounting screws. Grilles located in walls shall have Titus Type PF, or equal, steel frame. Exposed aluminum portions of wall mounted grilles, flange, and frame shall be finished in white baked enamel equal to Titus No. 26 finish. Duct mounted grilles in utility area shall be finished with lacquer sprayed and baked in aluminum equal to Titus No. 01 finish.





B. All Wall and duct mounted return or exhaust grilles, designated "RG or EG---", shall be Titus No. 23RL and No. 23RS, or equal, 45Ε single core steel grilles with fixed bars complete with opposed multi-blade locking damper. Grilles located in walls shall have Titus Type PF, or equal, steel frames. Wall mounted grilles, flange, and frame shall be finished in off white baked enamel equal to Titus No. 26 finish. Duct mounted grilles shall be finished with lacquer sprayed and baked in aluminum equal to Titus No. 01 finish.

C. Certain exhaust or vent grilles, designated as egg crate, shall be a Titus Model 50-F, or equal, all aluminum, eggcrate type grille with 1/2" x 1/2" x 1", 90% free area, and 7/8" wide frame. Grille shall be finished in baked aluminum enamel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.






BLANK PAGE




RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING238316 - 1

SECTION 23 83 16

RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Summary

A. Radiant heating systems, where shown on the Drawings and Schedules, shall be hydronic, and shall include the following:

1. Crosslinked polyethylene (PEXa) piping. 2. Distribution manifold(s) with balancing and flow control valves where required. 3. Pipe-to-manifold compression nut fittings. 4. Cold-expansion and compression-sleeve fittings. 5. Pipe fasteners as approved by the manufacturer of the PEXa piping. 6. Controls. 7. Supervision and field engineering required for the complete and proper function of the

system.

1.2 Related Sections

A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete

B. Section 03 53 00 – Concrete Topping

C. Section 09 33 00 – Conductive Tiling

D. Section 09 67 13.33 – Conductive Elastomeric Liquid Flooring

1.3 References

A. Publications listed here are part of this specification to the extent they are referenced. Where no specific edition of the standard or publication is identified, the current edition shall apply.

B. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials

1. ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

2. ASTM F876, Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing 3. ASTM F877, Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot-

and Cold-Water Distribution Systems 4. ASTM F2014, Standard Specification for Non-Reinforced Extruded Tee Connections for

Piping Applications 5. ASTM F2080, Standard Specification for Cold-Expansion Fittings With Metal

Compression-Sleeves for Cross-Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe





C. CSA – Canadian Standards Association

1. CSA B137.5, Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing Systems for Pressure Applications 2. CSA B214, Installation Code for Hydronic Heating Systems

D. DIN – German Institute for Standardization (Deutsches Institut für Normung)

1. DIN 4726, Plastic Piping Used in Warm Water Floor Heating (Warmwasser-Fußbodenheizungen und Heizkörperanbindungen - Rohrleitungen aus Kunststoffen)

E. IAPMO – International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials

F. ICC – International Code Council

G. ISO – International Organization for Standardization

1. ISO 9001, Quality Management Systems – Requirements

H. ULC – Underwriters’ Laboratories of Canada

1. CAN/ULC S102.2, Surface Burning Characteristics of Flooring, Floor Covering and Miscellaneous Materials

I. PPI – Plastic Pipe Institute

1. PPI TR-3 / 2007, Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), Strength Design Basis (SDB), and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe

1.4 Definitions

A. Crosslinked polyethylene, commonly abbreviated PEX, is made from high density polyethylene (HDPE). Crosslinking is accomplished during manufacturing. Crosslinking enhances the physical & mechanical properties of the polymer. The high-temperature properties are improved. Chemical resistance is enhanced by resisting dissolution. Low temperature properties are also improved; its impact and tensile strength, scratch resistance, and resistance to brittle fracture are enhanced. The required degree of crosslinking, according to ASTM Standard F876, is between 70-89%. This specification requires PEX to be designated as PEXa and be manufactured by the high-pressure peroxide method.

1.5 Submittals

A. Comply with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. Approval and/or acceptance of all submittals is required prior to fabrication.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's Technical Manual, submittal forms, catalog cuts, brochures, specifications, and installation instructions. Submit data in sufficient detail to indicate compliance with the contract documents.

1. Submit manufacturer's instructions for installation.





2. Submit data for equipment, fittings, fasteners and associated items necessary for the installation of the piping and manifolds.

C. Submit computer-generated radiant heating system design indicating heat flux, pipe sizing, spacing, flow rates and temperatures. Design calculations shall be performed on pipe manufacturer’s software or equivalent.

D. Shop Drawings: Provide plans drawn to scale for all installation areas.

1. Indicate dimensions, descriptions of materials, general construction, component connections, anchorage methods and installation procedures.

2. Indicate design, schematic layout of system, including equipment, critical dimensions and piping/slab penetration details as well as details for protecting exposed PEX piping.

E. Certification

1. Submit independent certification results for the piping systems from an accredited independent testing laboratory.

2. The design shall be approved by a professional appropriately licensed in the jurisdiction where the installation will take place, as being complete and accurate.

3. Fittings shall be third-party certified to applicable referenced standards as part of the manufacturer’s PEX piping system, with independent listings from NSF, CSA and ICC, as applicable.

4. Fittings embedded within the thermal mass or encased behind walls or ceilings shall be certified to ASTM F2080.

F. Maintenance Instructions: Submit instructions for any maintenance required or recommended by manufacturer.

1.6 Quality Assurance

A. Comply with Section 01 43 00, Quality Assurance.

B. Manufacturer: Must be a company specializing in the Work of this Section with a minimum of 5 years documented experience.

C. All components shall be supplied by one manufacturer.

D. Pipe shall be manufactured in a facility whose quality management system is ISO 9001 certified.

E. Cross-linked polyethylene (PEXa) pipe shall conform and be certified to ASTM F876, F877 and CSA B137.5. Fittings shall conform and be certified to ASTM F877 or F2080, and CSA B137.5. Pipes with an oxygen diffusion barrier shall conform to the requirements for oxygen permeability DIN 4726 and shall also have the PPI TR-3 listing.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. Comply with Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements.





B. Deliver and store piping and equipment in shipping containers with labeling in place.

1. Pipe shall be kept in original shipping boxes until required for installation.

C. Store piping and equipment in a safe place, dry, enclosed, under cover, in a well-ventilated area.

1. Do not expose pipe to ultraviolet light beyond exposure limits recommended by manufacturer.

2. Protect piping and manifolds from entry of contaminating materials. Install suitable plugs in open pipe ends until installation.

3. Where possible, connect pipes to assembled manifolds to eliminate possibility of contaminants and cross-connections.

4. Piping shall not be dragged across the ground or other surfaces, and shall be stored on a flat surface with no sharp edges.

D. Protect materials from damage by other trades.

E. Pipe shall be protected from oil, grease, paint, direct sunlight and other elements as recommended by manufacturer.

1.8 Warranty

A. Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty.

1. The warranty shall include as a minimum, provisions to repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period, or provide for replacement with new materials, at no expense to Owner.

2. The radiant heating pipe manufacturer shall warrant the cross-linked polyethylene piping to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of twenty-five (25) years..

3. Cold-expansion compression-sleeve fittings shall be warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of twenty-five (25) years.

4. All manifolds, distribution headers, thermostats and actuators shall be warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) years starting at completion of successful pressurized water tests immediately following system installation.

B. Provide installer’s guarantee as appropriate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturer

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactuers offering productes that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:





1. REHAU.. 2. UPONOR

2.2 Piping

A. All radiant heating pipe shall be high-density crosslinked polyethylene manufactured using the high-pressure peroxide method of crosslinking (PEXa). Pipe shall conform to ASTM F876, ASTM F877 and CSA B137.5.

B. Pipe shall be rated for continuous operation of 100 psi gauge pressure at 180°F temperature (690 kPa @ 82°C), and 80 psi gauge pressure at 200°F temperature (550 kPa @ 93°C).

C. When required, pipe shall have a co-extruded oxygen diffusion barrier capable of limiting oxygen diffusion through the pipe to less than 0.32 mg/(m2/d) @ 104°F (40°C) water temperature, in accordance with DIN 4726.

D. Bend Radius

1. The minimum bend radius for cold bending of the pipe shall be not less than five (5) times the outside diameter.

2. Bends with a radius less than this shall require the use of a bending template as supplied by the pipe manufacturer, and/or hot air.

E. Pipe to have a Flame Spread Index of less than 25, and a Smoke Developed Index of less than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 (in U.S.) or CAN/ULC S102.2 (in Canada). In any case where the pipe does not conform to these standards, appropriate piping insulation shall be installed in order to meet the standard.

2.3 Fittings

A. Fittings shall be third-party certified to applicable standards ASTM F877, ASTM F2080 and CSA B137.5 as part of the manufacturer’s PEX piping system, with independent listings from IAPMO, NSF, CSA and ICC, as applicable.

B. Compression nut manifold fittings shall be manufactured of corrosion-resistant brass with a barbed insert and a reusable split compression ring.

C. Compression-sleeve fittings shall be manufactured of brass and shall be supplied by the piping manufacturer as part of a proven cataloged system.

D. Fittings embedded within the thermal mass or encased behind walls or ceilings shall be cold-expansion compression-sleeve fittings certified to ASTM F2080. Where required by the manufacturer, fittings shall be protected from external environmental conditions.

2.4 Manifolds

A. Material: Distribution manifolds shall be manufactured of brass or copper and be supplied by the piping manufacturer as a proven cataloged part of the manufacturer's system.





B. Brass manifolds shall be produced from extruded brass round pipe with tapped holes for connections, and be pre-assembled by the manufacturer. 100% of manifolds used shall have been air tested by the manufacturer with no indication of leaks.

C. Balancing Manifolds

1. Manifold shall be brass balancing manifolds shall be equipped with integral visual flow gauges, circuit balancing and flow control valves, isolation valves with integral thermometer housings, and air vent/fill ports.

2. Each circuit valve shall be supplied with a manual actuating handle for filling/purging operation.

2.5 Controls

A. Refer to Radiant Heating Injection Mixing System and controls Section 23 83 17.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Acceptable Installers

A. As a minimum, installation shall be performed by qualified laborers trained by the manufacturer in the procedures of PEX radiant heating systems and they shall be appropriately licensed for the jurisdiction where the installation will take place.

3.2 Examination

A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.3 Preparation

A. Coordinate with related trades and manufacturer’s recommendations with regard to installation in conjunction with:

1. Reinforcing wire mesh or rebar. 2. Preparation of space for manifold installation.

B. Prepare the installation site as appropriate:

1. For Concrete Slab-on-Grade: Sub-grade should be compacted, flat and smooth to prevent damage to pipe or insulation. Approved vapor barrier material should be installed. Approved thermal insulation, according to the design, shall be installed. Reinforcing wire mesh, if required by structural design, must be flat and level, with all sharp ends pointing down. Finished grade of the thermal mass must be a minimum of 3/4 inch (19 mm) above





the top of PEX heating pipes.

C. Preparation of wall cavity for Manifold installation: See drawings to determine the width of the wall cabinet (if required) and required wall opening dimensions. Prepare a suitable cavity for the manifold, with a secure mounting plate that will secure the manifold at least 30 inches above floor level. Manifold must be installed in an area that will allow easy access for supply/return piping as well as future access maintenance.

3.4 Installation

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's published installation manual and/or published guidelines and final shop drawings.

B. Mount manifolds in the locations previously prepared or in previously installed cabinets, if used. Manifolds shall be mounted as level as possible.

C. Route piping in an orderly manner, according to layout and spacing shown in final shop drawings. All installation notes shown on the drawings shall be followed.

D. At connections and fittings, use a plastic pipe cutter to ensure square and clean cuts, and join pipes immediately or cap ends of pipe to seal from contaminants. Where fittings are installed within the thermal mass, they shall be wrapped in non-adhesive waterproof silicone tape or sealed within a heat-shrink material approved by the manufacturer.

E. Pipe shall be dispensed using a suitable uncoiling device. Remove twists prior to securing pipe. Pipe shall lie flat on an even plane. Finished grade of a thermal mass shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch (19 mm) above the top of PEX heating pipes. Fasten piping at no more than 3 feet (90 cm) intervals, being careful not to twist the pipe. In thin concrete slabs, secure piping every 2 feet (60 cm). Use only fasteners supplied or approved by the manufacturer of the PEX pipe.

F. Piping that passes through expansion joints shall be covered in protective polyethylene convoluted sleeving (flexible conduit) extending 15 inches (38 cm) on each side of the joint. Sleeving shall be secured on pipe to prevent movement during installation of thermal mass.

G. Where piping exits the thermal mass, a protective conduit shall be placed around the pipe, with the conduit extending a minimum of 6 inches (15 cm) into the floor and exiting by a minimum of 6 inches (15 cm). For penetrations at manifolds, use rigid PVC bend guides secured in place to prevent movement.

H. At the time of installation of each circuit of pipe, connect the pipe to the correct manifold outlet and record pipe length for balancing. If manifold is not installed, cap the end of the pipe and label the pipe's circuit numbers along with S for supply and R for return. Connect pipes to manifold as soon as possible and record circuit lengths. All circuits shall be labeled to indicate circuit length and serviced area.

I. The following precautions shall be taken in areas intended for carpet:

1. Notify carpet installer that radiant heating pipes have been installed. 2. Keep pipes 6 inches (15 cm) from all wall baseplates.





3. Install metal guards where pipe will pass through wall baseplates and where carpet tack strips will be installed.

J. The following precautions shall be taken in areas intended for hardwood flooring:

1. Ensure that nailing areas for hardwood flooring, if nailing is required, are clearly marked and known for hardwood installers.

K. If the radiant heating system substrate material (thermal mass) requires curing and/or has other limitations which can be influenced by the radiant heating system while in operation, then the radiant heating system shall not be put into operation until such time that the substrate material has fully cured or set according to the material requirements of the substrate manufacturer.

L. The installer shall confirm minimum and maximum exposure temperatures for the substrate material (thermal mass) and shall ensure proper radiant heating operating temperatures.

3.5 Field Quality Control

A. Filling, Testing & Balancing: Tests of hydronic heating systems shall comply with authorities having jurisdiction, and, where required, shall be witnessed by the building official.

B. Pressure gauges used in testing and balancing shall show pressure increments of 1 psig and shall be located at or near the lowest points in the distribution system.

C. Air Test

1. Charge the completed, yet unconcealed pipes with air at a minimum of 40 psig. 2. Do not exceed 150 psig. 3. Use liquid gas detector or soap solution to check for leakage at manifold connections.

D. Water Test

1. Purge air from pipes. 2. Charge the completed, yet unconcealed pipes with water. 3. Take necessary precautions to prevent water from freezing. 4. Check the system for leakage, especially at all pipe joints.

E. Perform a preliminary pressure test pressurizing the system to the greater of 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure or 100 psig for 30 minutes.

1. As the piping expands, restore pressure, first at 10 minutes into the test and again at 20 minutes.

2. At the end of the 30-minute preliminary test, pressure shall not fall by more than 8 psig from the maximum, and there shall be no leakage.

F. After successfully performing the preliminary pressure test, perform the main pressure test immediately.

1. The test pressure shall be restored and continued as the main test for 2 hours. 2. The main test pressure shall not fall more than 3 psig after 2 hours.





3. No leakage shall be detected.

G. Pressure shall be maintained and monitored during installation of the thermal mass.

1. If any leak is detected during installation of thermal mass, leak shall be found immediately and the area cleared for repair using manufacturer’s approved repair coupling.

2. Retest before covering repair.

H. Complete inspection and furnish test reports supplied by the manufacturer of the system.

3.6 Cleaning

A. Clean exposed surfaces upon completion of installation using clean, damp cloth. No cleaning agents are allowed.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.7 Protection

A. Protect installation throughout construction process until date of final completion.

B. Replace components that cannot be repaired.






BLANK PAGE




RADIANT HEATING INJECTION MIXING SYSTEM AND CONTROLS

238317 - 1

SECTION 23 83 17 RADIANT HEATING INJECTION MIXING SYSTEM AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes radiant heating hot water injection mixing system and related controls.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For injection mixing system and related controls.

1. Provide manufacturer’s literature for all items and accessories specified in this section.

B. Shop Drawings: Show piping layout and details including valves, and controls.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For radiant injection system and related controls.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INJECTION SYSTEM

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Taco – Radiant Mixing Block.

C. Radiant Mixing Block

1. The radiant mixing block shall be a complete injection system. Integral to the unit shall be a variable speed injection circulator and a constant speed system circulator complete with air elimination. Unit shall have a bronze casing and integral check valve.

2. The unit shall include a solid state microprocessor control system with large LCD DISPLAY. Controller shall include the following functions:

a. 2 Operation modes: outdoor reset and setpoint with or without Delta T limiting.





238317 - 2

b. Powered or unpowered demand signal. c. 100% Pump operation / control override switch. d. Automatic pump exercise. e. Adjustable reset ratio f. Warm weather shutdown.

3. The system shall include the following sensors:

a. Outdoor air. b. Boiler water strap on. c. Radiant supply water strap on.

4. Performance Data

a. Flow Range: 0 – 15.5 GPM b. Head Range: 0 – 15 Feet c. Minimum Fluid Temperature: 32° F. d. Maximum Fluid Temperature: 185° F. e. Maximum Working Pressure: 125 psi f. Connection Sizes: ¾” NPT g. Unit shall operate on 120V, 60 hz, 1 ph., and be equipped with a plug in

connection.

2.2 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT

A. A programmable thermostat shall be provided for each system including a 24 volt control transformer mounted in a box adjacent to the radiant mixing block.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems.

B. Install radiant heating block in piping as detailed on drawings adjacent to radiant heating manifolds.

C. Install manifolds and radiant heating block in accessible locations.

3.2 START UP DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assist in start up of system and to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain radiant heating systems and equipment.

B. Training: Provide “how-to-use” training session that details exact operating procedures of equipment.





238317 - 3






238317 - 4

BLANK PAGE




INTEGRATED AUTOMATION250000 - 1

SECTION 25 00 00

INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes a summary of all Integrated Automation which is principally Direct Digital Control (DDC System) related work.

B. Related Sections: 1. 25 05 01 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 2. 25 08 00 – COMMISSIONING OF INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

C. Work by Others: 1. The following work will be done by other contractors, as specified under respective

headings, which this contractor shall read to ascertain what is called for therein: a. General Construction b. Plumbing Including Fire Suppression Work c. HVAC d. Electric e. Fire Alarm Equipment Supplier


A. Addition of New DDC Systems 1. The work under this contract shall be performed by Siemens in accordance with their

State Term Pricing Agreement. 2. The contract shall include new work as shown, specified, or required, and shall include,

but not limited to, the following principal components: a. All existing controls for existing equipment shall remain unchanged. b. Provide complete system for control of all equipment and systems as specified

herein. Refer to the following: 1) Extend status and alarm signal wiring from new building fire alarm panel. 2) Extend alarm signal wiring from new sump pump. 3) Extend control, status, and alarm wiring for two (2) new exhaust fans. 4) Alternate Bid No. IA-1 – Extend status and alarm wiring from new

emergency generator.

B. Shop Drawings




INTEGRATED AUTOMATION250000 - 2

1. As soon as possible after award of the contract, and prior to fabrication, the contractor shall prepare complete shop drawings of the DDC systems, which shall in general conform to the bidding documents; any deviations deemed necessary by the contractor shall be noted and agreed upon prior to starting the work.

2. In preparing his working drawings, the contractor shall coordinate the location of all equipment and devices with the other contractors. Drawings shall show ceiling grids, lights, registers, grilles, heat detection devices, access panel, skylights, etc. Any changes in fabricated DDC layout occasioned by lack of coordination shall be made by the contractor at no change in the contract price.

C. Excavation And Backfilling And Restoration Of Surfaces 1. Refer to Division 01.

D. Refer to Division 01.

E. Equipment 1. Any and all costs associated with piping, electric, wiring, conduit, supports, pads, or

other modifications to accommodate installation for manufacturer=s equipment that differs from equipment layout on drawings shall be included on contractor=s bid. The contractor is responsible to insure that the equipment will fit within space allocated with appropriate clearances for maintenance, operation, servicing, and code.

F. Schedule 1. Refer to Division 01.






COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

250501 - 1

SECTION 25 05 01


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes a summary of all Integrated Automation which is principally Direct Digital Control (DDC System) related work.

B. Related Sections: 1. 25 00 00 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 2. 25 08 00 – COMMISSIONING OF INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. This contract shall include the furnishing of all labor and materials required for the installation of new temperature regulating systems to monitor, control, and regulate automatically and completely the new air conditioning, ventilating, hydronic and heating systems, as shown on the accompanying drawings and hereinafter specified. The temperature control equipment shall be installed by trained mechanics and technicians employed by the manufacturer and working in conjunction with the other contractors.

B. Bids for the temperature control work, hereinafter specified, shall be based upon a Siemens Apogee system by local branch office, direct digital control system with electronic sensors for indication and control functions, electronically actuated devices including new dampers, valves, etc., and all connections to sensors and actuated devices. The DDC system for this project shall be fully integrated into the existing Miami University Campus System, such that complete control, monitoring, programming, reporting of alarms, etc. can be performed from any of the existing workstations. This integration shall provide BACnet Level 6 capability.

C. Contractor shall remove certain existing controls for portions of building HVAC, hydronic and heating systems scheduled to be removed. Remove unused exposed air piping; plug unused concealed air piping at walls. All items including thermostats, controllers, DDC sensors, DDC controllers and actuators which will not be reused in the final arrangement shall be carefully removed by the contractor and shall remain the property of Miami University.

D. Where existing systems are not specifically mentioned in this specification, they shall remain, as is. Contractor will not be responsible for proper operation of existing controls.





250501 - 2

E. The new systems shall be complete with all piping connections, switches, relays, certain wiring, or other devices required to accomplish the required results. All control devices shall be of the manufacturer's best construction and of positive positioning type where mixing is required. Complete shop drawings of the control system shall be submitted for approval. Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with interconnections, with equipment specified under other sections of this specification including electric work, and all work furnished by the Direct Digital Control Contractor shall be coordinated therewith.

F. The DDC system for this project shall be fully integrated into the existing Miami University campus Siemens Direct Digital Control system. This integration shall be performed in a manner that complete control, monitoring, alarming, trending, scheduling and graphics for all input/output points required for this project can be performed from any of the existing Ethernet workstations connected to both management level network and to the servers. All additions to the Digital Control System shall be through a direct connection over the University=s Ethernet network.

G. Conformance and Specification: All BACnet devices and services supplied as part of this project shall conform strictly to the ASHRAE/ANSI BACnet standard. Any deviations, limitations, or omissions when compared to the standard shall be fully outlined in writing as part of the required submittals.

H. The BACnet specification defines a comprehensive set of object types and applications services that exist at all levels of control in a distributed, hierarchical building automation system model. The specification defines the six Aconformance classes@ and the nine Afunctional groups@ that must be met in order to conform to the full functionality of BACnet. Conformance classes are numbered 1-6 and are hierarchical in nature. The requirements for each class include all of the requirements of all of the upper classes with a lower number. Functional groups are collections of BACnet standard object types and applications services that collectively meet the communication requirements of a single building automation function.

I. BACnet Conformance Classes: All control system devices provided and installed shall strictly conform to the conformance classes defined under the current version of the BACnet protocol at the time of bidding. Any changes in the protocol from the time of award of contract through the end of the warranty period shall be provided and installed free of cost to the University. All BACnet devices supplied shall be able to initiate and execute service requests as indicated in each conformance class. Control system devices included in this project shall conform to conformance class one (1).

J. BACnet Functional Groups: All new digital system devices provided and installed shall conform to the requirements of current and future BACnet functional groups for all object types and control applications found in the I/O schedule in this specification.

K. The following BACnet functional groups shall be fully supported: 1. Clock Functions 2. Hand Held Workstation (HHWS) 3. Personnel Computer (PCWS) 4. Event Initiation 5. Event Response 6. Files 7. Reinitialize





250501 - 3

8. Virtual Operator Interface 9. Virtual Terminal

L. Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement: Each bidder shall submit a Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS), created by the BACnet device manufacturer which identifies the particular options implemented in each BACnet device supplied as part of this specification. The PICS supplied shall contain five (5) sections. The first section shall provide basic information to identify and describe each BACnet device. The second section shall enumerate the standard object types that are supported and shall indicated for each object type, whether only the standard properties are supported or if the optional services are supported and for each service indicate if the implementation can initiate the service request, respond to the service request, or both. The forth section shall enumerate the BACnet functional groups that are supported. The last section shall indicate the data link and physical layer options that are implemented.

M. Interface Responsibility: It shall be the control contractor=s responsibility to ensure that the BACnet interface between the existing Siemens control system network and the new digital controllers perform as specified. All new data points and control programs shall appear to the existing operators console as native points and shall interoperate with the existing system hardware and software so that all alarms, commands, set point adjustments, time schedules, point databases and controller programs are totally functional through the BACnet gateway interface. It shall be the contractor=s responsibility to map the new controller points and all functionality into the gateway.

1.4 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLERS

A. Furnish, install, connect and program, requisite direct digital controllers. Bids shall be based on Siemens Building Technologies. All monitoring and controlling functions associated with new exhaust fans shall be performed within the above described DDC controllers.

B. Each controller shall be capable of performing the functions herein specified and energy management functions, supply air reset, economizer cycle, adaptive optimal start, duty cycling, and optimization program execution. Programs shall be built-in including algorithms for proportional, integral, and derivative control in any combination as needed. Adjustments to the controller shall include, but not be limited to: proportional, gain, and integral rate, the velocity and acceleration constants associated with incremental control, and on/off values of two position control. All setpoints shall be adjustable at DDC control panel. Each DDC control panel shall have the ability to override its controlled device throughout their entire operating range. Provide hand-off-auto operator override switches for all digital outputs and hand-off and graphic switches for all analog outputs. Switches shall be mounted either within the DDC Controller key-accessed enclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed to prevent unauthorized overrides. DDC Controllers shall monitor the status of all overrides and inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. DDC Controllers shall also collect override activity information for reports.

C. The DDC system shall be Web-based and interoperable using BACnet communications without the use of gateways except for gateways between higher level BACnet IP networks and lower level MS/TP application specific control networks or gateways to non BACnet equipment, (i.e. electrical equipment, Hart meters, VFD=s). When gateways are incorporated into the design,





250501 - 4

the system shall be configured to provide complete exposure of all non-BACnet data to the web server. The web server and any connected browser shall be configured and licensed in such a way that permits a minimum of 25 simultaneous users. Manufacturer's products, including design, materials, fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 135, ANSI/ASHRAE 135.1, ASME B31.1 and NFPA 70, except as modified herein or indicated otherwise.

D. Controls for a single mechanical system such as an air handling unit, shall not be divided between two or more controllers. A single DDC controller shall manage functions for a single mechanical system using stand-alone processes in the controller.

E. Locate DDC controller cabinets where shown on the drawings. If not shown on the drawings, install in the most accessible space close to the controlled equipment.

F. With each DDC panel, furnish a transient surge protection device. Such protection will protect the DDC components from voltage spike on incoming 120 volt, A.C., power. Wiring within DDC panels of different voltages shall be isolated from each other.

G. The DDC controllers shall have a sufficient quantity of input and output points to perform the functions herein specified and each controller shall have 20% minimum spare point capacity in panel.

H. All relays shall be equipped with surge suppressor wired across relay coil.

1.5 SENSORS

A. Temperature Sensors: Temperature sensors shall be linear precision elements with ranges appropriate for each specific application.

B. The temperature sensor shall be of the resistance type, and shall be either two-wire 1000 ohm nickel RTD, or two-wire 1000 ohm platinum RTD. The following point types (and the accuracy of each) are required, and their associated accuracy values include errors associated with the sensor, lead wire, and A to D conversion: 1. Water Temperature - + .25 Accuracy 2. Room Temperature - + .5 Accuracy

C. Current Sensing Relays: Motor status indication, where shown on the plans, shall be sensed by Nielsen-Kuljian, Inc. Sentry 250 and SC250, Veris Industries, Inc., or approved equal, split core current sensors approved for use with variable frequency drives.

D. Control Relays: 1. Control pilot relays shall be of a modular plug-in design with retaining springs or clips. 2. Mounting bases shall be snap-mount. 3. DPDT, 3PDT, or 4PDT relays shall be provided, as appropriate for application. 4. Contacts shall be rated for 10 amps at 120VAC. 5. Relays shall have an integral indicator light and check button.





250501 - 5

1.6 WORK BY OTHERS

A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all power wiring (120 VAC and above) to all building control panels and shall provide mounting and power to all 120/24 VAC control transformers for VAV terminal equipment controllers.

B. The Electric Contractor shall furnish and install an Ethernet Data Jack in close proximity to each building control panel for connection to a laptop PC.

1.7 ELECTRIC CONNECTIONS

A. Where indicated, the Direct Digital Control Contractor shall provide the following: 1. Requisite DDC controllers, complete with all components needed for connection to

remote input and output devices. 2. All internal wiring connections between devices in DDC equipment. 3. All electrical connections in DDC equipment from remote sensors, etc. 4. All network cabling between communication closets, risers and all DDC system BACnet

building controllers BACnet application specific controllers, variable frequency drives, operator workstations, routers, switches, and hubs.

B. All other conduit and wiring required to make the system operate, including connections to remote indicating devices and sensors and including connections at DDC panels, shall be furnished and installed by the Digital Control Contractor, and this work shall comply with applicable requirements of the electric specifications. Each signal cable shall consist of individually color-coded conductors terminated on terminals in DDC panel in a workmanlike manner. Wiring shall include all wires necessary for address command, digital status, analog value data acquisition, etc. Each end of each conductor shall have identifying number. The Direct Digital Control Contractor shall furnish a complete wiring diagram showing electrical connections to all items of equipment furnished under this bid. 1. Color coding for all Class 2 low voltage control cables shall meet the University of

Cincinnati Color Code Requirements: a. 24 VAC Power/Signal: Red/White b. Digital Input: Orange c. Digital Output: Blue d. Analog Input: Green e. Analog Output: Yellow f. Thermostat Cable: Gray


A. Materials and equipment shall be the catalogued products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production and installation of automatic temperature control systems and shall be manufacturer=s latest standard design that complies with the specification requirements. Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion of this contract.

B. It is the responsibility of the DDC Contractor to be familiar with all codes, rules, ordinances, and regulations of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and their interpretations, which are in effect.





250501 - 6

C. All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules, regulations, and all codes and ordinances of the local, state, and federal authorities having jurisdiction. Such codes, when more restrictive, shall take precedence over these plans and specifications. As a minimum, the installation shall comply with the current edition in effect 30 days prior to receipt of bids of the following codes: DDC and systems and equipment shall be designed and installed, commissioned, and serviced by either manufacturer-employed or factory-authorized dealer-factory-trained personnel. The manufacturer shall have an in-place support facility within 100 miles of the site with technical staff, documentation, spare parts inventory, and necessary test and diagnostic equipment to support the installation. The installer shall have an established working relationship with the Control System manufacturer of not less than three years. 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Ohio Building Code (All Sections)

D. The latest issue of applicable standards and recommended practices of the following agencies in effect and shall form a part of the specification to the extent each agency's relative standards or recommended practices apply to the Systems and their components as specified herein. 1. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 4. Electronic Industries Association (EIA) 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 10. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

E. DDC Contractor shall be solely responsible for compliance with all health and safety regulations, performance of the work in a safe and competent manner, and use of industry accepted installation procedures required for their work.

F. All systems, equipment, components, accessories, and installation hardware shall be new and free from defects and shall be UL listed where applicable. All components shall be in current production and shall be a standard product of the system or device manufacturer. Refurbished or reconditioned components are unacceptable. Each component shall bear the make, model number, device tag number, and the UL label as applicable. All systems components of a given type shall be the product of the same manufacturer.

G. The manufacturer of the building automation system shall comply with ISO 9000 (Model for Quality Assurance in Production, Installation, and Servicing). The intent of this specification requirement is to ensure that the products from the manufacturer are delivered through a Quality System and Framework that will assure consistency in the products delivered for this project.

H. This system shall have a documented history of compatibility by design for a minimum of 2 years. Future compatibility shall be supported for no less than 10 years Compatibility shall be defined as the ability to upgrade existing field panels and extend new field panels on a previously installed network.

I. The system shall be commissioned in accordance with Section 230800, DDC pre-functional and functional check lists, and all manufactures commissioning guides and associated check lists.





250501 - 7

System trend logs with collection frequencies, COV values and trend frequencies as detailed on the DDC commissioning forms shall record all system performance for at least 2 full months prior to request for final acceptance in order to provide verification of accuracy and performance goals. DDC contractor shall provide analysis and written feedback on trend logs indicating any abnormal conditions or punch list items contained in trend log data delivered to the Engineer and Owners Commissioning agent.

1.9 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturers' specification sheets for each type of equipment to show compliance with the project specification. Highlight each compliance item and reference each item to the relevant specification paragraph number. Submit sufficient manufacturers' information to allow verification of compliance by the reviewing authority. Equipment and software specification compliance data submitted includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Product data on all components used to meet the requirements of the specifications such

as enclosures, sensors, control devices, operators work stations (OWS=s), routers, gateways, servers, all device product installation and users manual documentation, configuration details such as object naming conventions, network numbering, device identification, device description, mounting details, power supplies, etc.

2. PICS Statements: Provide a complete set of descriptive and technical information on the BACnet communications capabilities of the proposed system. Each bidder shall submit a complete set of Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements (PICS) for all hardware and software devices supplied by the BACnet device manufacture, which identifies the particular options, implemented in each BACnet device supplied as part of this specification. The PICS supplied shall contain five (5) sections. The first section shall provide basic information to identify and describe each BACnet device. The second section shall enumerate the standard object types that are supported. The third shall indicate for each object type, whether only the standard properties are supported or if the optional services are supported and for each service indicate if the implementation can initiate the service request, respond to the service request, or both. The fourth section shall enumerate the BACnet BIBBs that are supported. The last section shall indicate the data link and physical layer options that are implemented. In addition to the standard published PICS statements provided by the device manufacturer, prepare a spreadsheet containing a complete object by object property listing showing how each supported object property is implemented in each device. For each property, include its data type and range, and all applications services that can read, write, or manipulate the property. All control components and devices used on the project if currently listed by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) shall carry the mark of the BACnet Testing Labs. Tests performed shall be based on ASHRAE (Standard 135.1P) AMethod of Test for Conformance to BACnet@. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for this and / or other system and not custom designed especially for this project. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use for at least two years.

3. Provide to the owner, a complete software and engineering manual that contains system engineering information and technical documentation that supports the following: a. Complete device configuration and set up b. Complete device programming c. Service of all proposed control devices, including server, and operators work

stations





250501 - 8

d. Operating systems software e. Application software f. Complete set of graphics application development software g. Web browser software listing (source code) h. Complete system database information including manufacturers users manuals,

system schemas, RPC=s, records, reports, i. Description of the user licenses (including numbers of simultaneous users) being

proposed, j. Third part integration capabilities (note any required or additional software

integration requirements by ATC manufacturer) and any required licenses, third party utilities and the proposed application programming manuals for each of the control devices proposed

k. Clearly indicate where proposed owners documentation does not completely comply with this part of the specification.

4. The DDC Contractor shall submit AutoCAD generated schematic drawings for the entire control system for review and approval before work shall begin. The submittal shall include a bill of material reference list as well as equipment sequences of operation. A physical layout diagram showing the entire proposed building systems network architecture (include owners cable entry location, building control room (BCR), Telecommunications rooms (TR), equipment intermediate distribution frame (EIDF) room, cable risers, switch locations, horizontal cabling on each floor, horizontal connection points (HCP) to ATC equipment (Terminal Units), router locations, and each device (label all control devices and their ID=s), BACnet device ID and location. Also refer to Paragraph 240500-23.

5. Submit temperature, lighting system and any other specified building systems physical layout diagrams for each air handling unit, terminal unit, chilled and heating water system, exhaust, meter, or auxiliary equipment connection made at the point/object level. Indicate on layout each physical object (AI, AO, BI, BO) used for each input/output served by each control device.

6. Submit a complete set of sequences of operation for all controlled equipment and systems as required to meet specific project control sequences of operation and system interoperability.

7. Record AAs Built@ Submittals a. Submit final copies of as-built shop drawings. These final submittals shall reflect

all field modifications and change orders required to complete the installation. Submittal drawings will include revised control diagrams, device panel layout drawings, revised sequences of operation, wiring diagrams, termination details, object / point=s schedules, total campus or building system network layouts, valve schedules, damper schedules and room schedules. Drawings shall be "B" sized 11 inches x 17inches. Submittal brochures will include both a hard copy and an electronic copy in PDF format detailing all product data sheets on all control devices and associated equipment. As part of the as-built drawings, the DDC Contractor will provide a network riser and detailed floor plans showing horizontal detailed routing of all DDC and (and other specified building system devices) networked communication cables along with each devices I/O analog sensor wires, control or status input devices. Provide these with the control device locations, and communication trunk routing, each of the actual sensor locations shown on them.

b. In addition, contractor shall also provide a redline drawing indicating cabling paths for network and 24 VAC power.





250501 - 9

c. Submit three (3) complete sets of submittal documents in a three-ring notebook and organized by subject with divider tabs.

d. Submit three (3) electronic copies of all submittal documents in Printed Document Format (PDF) on Compact Disks (CD=s).

1.10 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST

A. The Functional Performance test (FPT) shall be executed by the Contractor and approved by the University. If the project is phased, then a separate test plan shall be executed for each phase. Use FPT sample procedures, designated by the Commissioning Agent, as a guide to creating the test plan spreadsheets.

B. Obtain written approval of the Functional Performance Test plan for each phase of testing before beginning that phase of testing. Give the Commissioning Agent written notification of planned testing at least 30 days prior to the test but not before completion of any test and balance (TAB) requirements have been completed. Notification shall be accompanied by the proposed test procedure, a verified Pre-performance Testing Checklist, and a written estimated time table required to perform the test. After the written notification is received, the Commissioning Agent shall convene a meeting with the Contractor and the Owner at least 14 days prior to testing. In no case will the Contractor be allowed to start testing without written University approval of the Functional Performance Test plan.

C. Demonstrate compliance of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning control system with the contract documents including proper labeling of controls and wiring. Furnish personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform calibration and site testing. Ensure that test personnel are regularly employed in the testing and calibration of DDC systems.

D. Functional Performance testing will include, but not be limited to, workstation operations, calibration results for input and output devices required by manufacturer, proper tuning of control loops, and ensuring proper execution of the sequence of operation. Use the BACnet protocol analyzer during the performance testing to demonstrate communications reliability.

E. The Pre-performance Testing Checklist shall be used as the Contractor's guide to prepare for the FPT and to guide discussions at the pre-performance test meeting between the Contractor and the University. Every item on the check list shall be validated by the Contractor's QC representative prior to the test meeting.

F. Verify all maintenance personnel interface tools have been delivered, all system and database software installed, and graphic pages created for each workstation. Notify the University when phone lines or network connections are needed at least 30 days prior to installation of the workstation. 1. Verify integrity/safety of all electrical connections. 2. Verify proper interface with fire alarm system. 3. Verify proper communications over network segments and between controllers. 4. Co-ordinate with TAB contractor to obtain control settings that are determined from

balancing procedures. 5. Test, calibrate, and set all digital and analog sensing and actuating devices as required. 6. Check and set zero and span adjustments for all actuating devices as required.





250501 - 10

7. Check each digital controller for stand-alone operation by temporarily removing from the network.

8. Check proper sequences have been installed and tested. 9. Check all control loops have been properly tuned. 10. Check all alarms are programmed and routed to their proper destination. 11. Check all trends are operating for each item marked for trending on the points list. 12. Check all schedules are operating for each item marked for schedules on the points list. 13. Complete all "as-built" record drawings and I/O points list.

G. The test procedure reporting documents shall be developed by the Contractor and based specifically on the control system installed in a spread sheet format allowing sufficient space for individual testing of each area of the control system. List the test procedure and the expected response for each piece of equipment and system in each test area specified. Develop a separate row or column for each item that is required to be "demonstrated" within a test area. Allow ample space for comments, pass, fail, and retest lines. Each area of testing shall have four signature lines, one for the Contractor's QC representative, the Contractor's FPT administrator, the Commissioning Agent representative, and the Owner to acknowledge successful completion for each test area. Include references to the paragraph number or drawing number in the contract documents for each item or group of items to be tested. BACnet protocol analyzer test results shall be included with the test reporting. During and after completion of the Functional Performance Test, identify, determine causes, replace, repair or calibrate equipment that fails to meet the specification, and submit a written report to the University.

H. Document all tests with detailed test results. Explain in detail the nature of each failure and corrective action taken. Provide a written report containing test documentation after the Functional Performance Test. Schedule a meeting with the Owner to present the results to the University after all failures have been corrected. Based on the report and test review meeting, the University will determine the successful completion of the testing. If retesting of any portion of the FPT is required, do not retest until after receipt of written notification by the University. At the conclusion of retest, assessment will be repeated. The University reserves the right to require retesting of 100 percent on every component in the system when results from sampled areas are found deficient. Final test results will be submitted in electronic format on CD media.

I. Using the completed shop drawings and the FPT spreadsheet, conduct the performance verification test to demonstrate workstations and network communications are operating correctly, control system maintains set points, control loops are tuned, and controllers are programmed for the correct sequence of operation. The test report shall include the required four authorization signatures for successful completion of each test area. Test areas may have several sub-areas and each shall be fully satisfied to receive approval. Partial completion cannot be signed off. Random sampling may be used for certain test areas that have identical hardware and control sequences at the discretion of the University. These test areas, when allowed, are preceded with the statement "Ten percent sample testing allowed in this area for terminal zones that use identical controllers and sequences." If this statement is not found in the following test areas, the contractor shall assume that testing is at the 100 percent level for every terminal zone. When random sampling is allowed, the University will choose which items to test from the contract drawings. Allow for this when creating spreadsheets to insert the name and location on-site for random selection. Specifically the FPT consists of the individual test areas below and shall demonstrate the following:

J. Controller Capability, Accessibility, and Labeling





250501 - 11

1. Memory: Demonstrate that programmed data, parameters, and trend/alarm history collected during normal operation is not lost due to power failures.

2. Direct Connect Interface: Demonstrate the ability to connect directly to each type of digital controller with a notebook computer. Demonstrate that maintenance personnel interface tools perform as specified in the Manufacturer's technical literature.

3. Wiring and AC Power: Demonstrate the ability to disconnect any controller safely from its power source using the AC Power Table.

4. Demonstrate the ability to match wiring labels easily with the control drawings. Demonstrate the ability to locate a controller's location using the riser communications diagram in the control drawings.

5. Nameplates and Tags: Demonstrate the nameplates and tags bearing device unique identifiers are accurate and permanently attached to HVAC the control panel doors and back plates. Demonstrate that plastic or metal tags have the correct equipment name and point identifier.

K. Data Sharing 1. Data Presentation - On each web server workstation, demonstrate graphic display

capabilities as follows: Each graphic page shall initially display with current data within 5 seconds over a web-based browser connection and 15 seconds after a dial-up modem connection is established. Updated information shall occur when a change of value (COV) notification is received or, if COV is not implemented, within 15 seconds. Demonstrate that any data value from any networked device shall be available for plotting at a workstation in real time. Select binary and analog data concurrently and plot multiple instances of each data type on the same screen. Demonstrate the ability to select sampling intervals from 10 seconds to 60 minutes. For devices that implement COV reporting, select this as the means to update the plot.

2. Monitoring of Any Property - Demonstrate the ability to display any value of any property of any object from any networked device including all properties required by BACnet, all supported optional properties, and any proprietary extensions. Compare the difference between properties shown on the operator workstation over the network and the properties shown when directly connected to the controller in the field.

3. Set point and Parameter Modifications - Demonstrate the ability to modify all control loop set points and tuning parameters via BACnet messages initiated through operator interaction with graphics displays. Compare the difference between parameters modified on the operator workstation over the network and the parameters modified when directly connected to the controller in the field.

4. Peer-to-Peer Data Dependencies - Demonstrate all BACnet devices are installed and configured to exchange data values directly, without the need for operator or workstation intervention, to implement the sequence of operations specified in the mechanical system drawings and to share global data values.

L. Alarm and Event Management 1. Alarm Lists - Demonstrate that alarms are installed and configured to detect alarms and

events for the points indicated in the system drawings and are prioritized according to the standardized list designated by the Owner. Demonstrate system alarms, such as offline controllers are generated. Demonstrate software logic has been set up to avoid nuisance alarms, e.g., no temperature or status alarms shall be generated when fan systems are not running, or during start-up and shut-down transitions. Demonstrate that delays between the occurrence of an alarm condition and its annunciation are adjustable. Demonstrate alarms appear at any local workstation within 5 seconds over a web-based browser





250501 - 12

connection and 15 seconds on a dial-up modem connection. Demonstrate workstations display an alarm message window that appears on top of any other open windows and alarm message window has a distinctive color and appearance to attract the operator's attention. Demonstrate alarms that require operator acknowledgment and cause the alarm window to remain active until such an acknowledgment is received and when multiple alarms are received, unacknowledged alarms shall be displayed on a first-come first-served basis grouped by priority, with the highest priority alarms displayed first.

2. Alarm Parameter Adjustment - Demonstrate the ability for operators (with sufficient privilege) to change alarm parameters for all standard BACnet event types.

3. Alarm Routing Adjustment - Demonstrate the ability for operators (with sufficient privilege) to change alarm routing (BACnet notification classes) for each alarm including the destination for each type of alarm and alarm priority, the day of week and time of day, and the type of transition involved (TO-OFFNORMAL, TO-NORMAL, etc.).

M. Scheduling 1. Schedule Lists - Demonstrate that schedules are installed and configured start/stop, mode

change, and night setback schedules as defined in the sequence of operations including holidays. Demonstrate the ability to program alterations to programmed operating schedules based on the priority of events, including the ability to temporarily override the programmed schedule of equipment. Demonstrate operational override of a programmed schedule shall be for a specific duration following which the schedule shall revert back to the preprogrammed schedule.

2. Display of Start/Stop Times and Actions -Demonstrate the ability to inspect the content of any schedule and determine the specific control actions that will occur at any time, on any date.

3. Modification of Schedules - Demonstrate that all calendar entries and schedules shall be modifiable from any local workstation by an operator with sufficient privilege.

N. Trending 1. Archival Storage of Data - Demonstrate that archival storage of data will be handled by

the operator workstation/server. Demonstrate that local trend archiving and display can be accomplished through the use of BACnet Trend Log objects.

2. Modification of Trend Log Parameters - Demonstrate that an operator with sufficient privilege shall be able to change the data points to be logged, the sampling rate, and the duration of a trend log.

O. Device and Network Management 1. Display of Device Status Information - Operators shall be able to display at any time the

operational status of any device on the network. 2. Display of BACnet Object Information - Operators shall be able to display at any time

any property of any BACnet object. Operators shall be able to display property values of objects grouped by object type, object location, and building system.

3. Silencing Devices that are Transmitting Erroneous Data -Operators shall be able to direct a field device to stop transmitting event, alarm, or COV notifications until a subsequent command to resume transmissions is received.

4. Time Synchronization - Operators shall be able to set the time and date in any device on the network that supports time-of-day functionality. The operator shall be able to select to set the time and date for an individual device or all devices on a single local network.

5. Remote Device Re-initialization - Operators shall have the ability to issue re-initialization commands to any device that supports remote reinitialization.





250501 - 13

6. Backup and Restore - Operators shall have the ability to backup and restore all BACnet devices on the network that support this capability.

P. Execution of Sequence of Operation - Demonstrate the HVAC system operates properly through the complete sequence of operation. Insert the complete sequence of operation into the PVT spreadsheet with spaces between each line to allow for observations and comments.

Q. Control Loop Stability and Accuracy - Furnish the University graphed trends of control loops to demonstrate the control loop is stable and that setpoint is maintained. Control loop response shall respond to setpoint changes of 10 percent and stabilize in 3 minutes or less. Control loop trend data shall be in real time and the time between data points shall not be greater than one minute.

R. Stand-alone Capability - Demonstrate stand-alone controller capability for each central mechanical system, each air handler, and each zone. Zones with identical controllers and identical sequences may be randomly tested one controller per zone. Controllers shall provide stable and reliable stand-alone operation using default values or other method for values normally read over the network. Verify that a system alarm is generated indicating the communications failure for each controller in a stand-alone state.

1.11 TRAINING

A. Provide (2) 8 hour sessions of training to the Owner on all new equipment and operations.

1.12 GUARANTEE

A. The Direct Digital Control Contractor shall guarantee all workmanship and materials for a period one year from the date as defined in and Division 01. Any defects in materials or workmanship occurring during this guarantee period shall be made good by this contractor without additional cost to the Owner.

1.13 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

A. In addition to the guarantee on workmanship and materials herein specified the Direct Digital Control Contractor shall guarantee the successful operation of all new equipment to automatically perform the functions specified with only periodical servicing and to operate the various dampers, valves, etc. in the manner specified to maintain conditions within 1 of the instrument setting.

1.14 SYSTEM INPUT/OUTPUT SCHEDULES

A. Refer to pages at the end of this Section.


Mia

mi U

nive

rsity

Mid

dlet

own

Fin

kelm

an A

udito

rium

INP

UT

/OU

TP

UT

SC

HE

DU

LE

Sys

tem

and

Poi

nt D

escr

iptio

n

Temperature

Pressure

Rel. Humidity

% Speed

% Open

Pulse

Run Time

Enthalpy

Usage

GPM

Failure

Status

Level

Off-On

Slow-Fast

Open-Close

Damper Position

Valve Position

% Speed

Failure

Filter

Low Level

High Level

Low Analog Limit

High Analog Limit

Auto Lead Change

Stop/Start

Stop/Start (Opt)

Reset Schedule

DDC (PID)

Time Schedule

Astr Time Sched

Daylight Svgs Tm

Event Sequence

Value/State

Alarm

Inhibit Mode

Test Mode

Manual Mode

Rem

arks

Exh

aust

Fan

EF-

1

Com

man

d: O

ff-O

n

Sta

tus:

Ope

rate

Cur

rent

Sen

sor

Sta

tus:

Fai

lure

Not

e 1

Exh

aust

Fan

EF-

2

Com

man

d: O

ff-O

n

Sta

tus:

Ope

rate

Cur

rent

Sen

sor

Sta

tus:

Fai

lure

Not

e 1

Roo

m T

empe

ratu

re

Em

erge

ncy

Gen

erat

or

Sta

tus:

Ope

rate

Sta

tus:

Fai

lure

Sta

tus:

Bld

g O

n E

mer

g P

ower

Sta

tus:

Not

In A

uto

Bat

tery

Cha

rger

Sta

tus:

Fai

lure

Sum

p P

ump

Sta

tus:

Hi L

evel

Floa

t Sw

itch

Not

e 1:

DC

DM

- B

ased

on

not r

ecei

ving

pro

per s

tatu

s i.e

., fa

n no

t run

ning

whe

n co

mm

ande

d to

ope

rate

.

Pon

t of I

ndic

atio

n

Inpu

t Poi

nt T

ype

BACnet

Mea

sure

dC

alcu

late

don

Col

or G

raph

icP

rogr

ams

Dig

ital (

Dl)

Out

put P

oint

Typ

eS

yste

m F

eatu

res

Ana

log

(Al)

2 P

ositi

on

(DO

)G

radu

al

(AO

)A

larm

s

CO

MM

ON

WO

RK

RE

SU

LTS

FO

R IN

TE

GR

AT

ED

AU

TO

MA

TIO

N 2

5 05

01

- 14

M:\M

CE

Pro

ject

s\M

u\M

u200

9.01

(F

inke

lman

)\S

pec\

2505

10-I

n-O

ut.X

LS-

1

Mia

mi U

nive

rsity

Mid

dlet

own

Fin

kelm

an A

udito

rium

INP

UT

/OU

TP

UT

SC

HE

DU

LE

Sys

tem

and

Poi

nt D

escr

iptio

n

Temperature

Pressure

Rel. Humidity

% Speed

% Open

Pulse

Run Time

Enthalpy

Usage2

GPM

Failure

Status

Filter

Off-On

Slow-Fast

Open-Close

Damper Position

Valve Position

% Speed

Failure

Filter

Low Level

High Level

Low Analog Limit

High Analog Limit

Auto Lead Change

Stop/Start

Stop/Start (Opt)

Reset Schedule

DDC (PID)

Time Schedule

Astr Time Sched

Daylight Svgs Tm

Event Sequence

Value/State

Alarm

Inhibit Mode

Test Mode

Manual Mode

Rem

arks

Mis

cella

neou

s

Bld

g F

ire A

larm

Bld

g F

ire T

roub

le

Bld

g Fi

re S

upv.

Ana

log

(Al)

2 P

ositi

on

(DO

)G

radu

al

(AO

)A

larm

sP

ont o

f Ind

icat

ion

Inpu

t Poi

nt T

ype

BACnet

Mea

sure

dC

alcu

late

don

Col

or G

raph

icP

rogr

ams

Dig

ital (

Dl)

Out

put P

oint

Typ

eS

yste

m F

eatu

res

CO

MM

ON

WO

RK

RE

SU

LTS

FO

R IN

TE

GR

AT

ED

AU

TO

MA

TIO

N

EN

D O

F S

EC

TIO

N 2

5 05

10

25

05 0

1 -

15

M:\M

CE

Pro

ject

s\M

u\M

u200

9.01

(F

inke

lman

)\S

pec\

2505

10-I

n-O

ut.X

LS-

2





250501 - 16

BLANK PAGE




COMMISSIONING OF INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

250800 - 1

SECTION 25 08 00


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes commissioning process of all commissioning of Direct Digital Control System work.


C. Related Sections: 1. 25 00 00 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 2. 25 05 01 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

1.3 DEFINITIONS




D. DDC: Direct Digital Controls.

E. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.









250800 - 2

D. Participate in DDC systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.




A. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for actual DDC systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be furnished and installed as part of the construction contract.








3. Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's prestart and startup checklists for DDC systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be verified and tested.


5. Certificate of readiness certifying that DDC systems, subsystems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing.


1.7 SUBMITTALS







250800 - 3


PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Certify that DDC systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents.

B. Certify that DDC instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded.









C. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of DDC systems at the direction of the CxA.








250800 - 4




B. Scope of DDC testing shall include entire DDC installation.


D. The CxA along with the DDC Contractor, testing and balancing Subcontractor, and DDC Contractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for DDC systems, subsystems, and equipment.





I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the DDC system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.


3.4 DDC SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES

A. The following systems shall be commissioned: 1. DDC Systems including:

a. All new systems.





Project:

Date: Building:

Location:





Start-Up Plan


Checklists



TAB

Start-Up Witness

Test Procedure

Other Retest

Other Training


Approval Dates




Start-Up Plan


Checklists



TAB

Start-Up Witness

Test Procedure





Date:

Building:

Location:











with the equipment.



Agenda.


















Comments:

Training Methods.






Written handouts

Classroom lecture


Video presentation


Comments:




ELECTRICAL WORK260000 - 1

SECTION 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes a summary of all Electrical related work.


1. 260500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 2. 260519 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTOR AND CABLES 3. 260526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4. 260529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5. 260533 – RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6. 250553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 7. 260800 – COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL 8. 260923 – LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 9. 262416 – PANELBOARDS 10. 262726 – WIRING DEVICES 11. 263213 – ENGINE GENERATOR 12. 263600 – TRANSFER SWITCHES 13. 265100 – INTERIOR LIGHTING

C. Work by Others:


a. General Construction b. Plumbing Including Fire Suppression Work c. HVAC d. Integrated Automation e. Fire Alarm Equipment Supplier






A. Addition of New Electrical Systems

1. The Electric Contractor shall provide all wiring (Section 28 05 13) and install all Fire Alarm Equipment shown on the plans and specified in Divisions 26 and 28. The Electric Contractor shall assist the Fire Alarm Equipment Supplier with check-out, start-up, and testing of the new Fire Alarm System.

2. The contract shall include new work as shown, specified, or required, and shall include, but not limited to, the following principal components:


1) Provide lighting and power for new building addition. 2) Extend branch circuit to new elevator. 3) Provide smoke detectors at elevator landings. 4) Provide manual pull station at new exit door. 5) Provide ADA controls for new door. 6) Provide emergency and egress lighting.


1) Provide direct/indirect lighting in the restrooms. The lamp type shall be T8. 2) Provide power for new building addition. 3) Provide new horn strobe devices. 4) Provide GFI outlet at each “bank” of sinks.

c. Provide ADA Accessible Restrooms for Dressing Rooms

1) Provide direct/indirect lighting in the restrooms. The lamp type shall be T8. 2) Provide new horn strobe devices. 3) Provide GFI outlet at each sink.


1) Provide direct/indirect lighting in the restrooms. The lamp type shall be T8. 2) Provide new horn strobe devices. 3) Provide GFI outlet at the sink.

e. Modified Entry Doors for ADA Access

1) Provide ADA accessibility for the front doors. It is desirable to have controls for the automatic doors inside and outside. In addition, there will be a control in the vestibule for the outward path only.

f. Replace Drinking Fountains to Comply with ADA Requirements

1) Reuse existing electrical circuitry to supply power to new water coolers.

g. Fire Alarm System





1) Provide a new fire alarm system throughout the building. 2) Provide speaker/strobe devices throughout the building. 3) Provide new smoke detectors/heat detectors in new and existing elevator

hoist ways. 4) Provide new smoke detectors at elevator landings. Integrate requisite

elevator recall features. 5) Provide duct type smoke detectors in all existing and new air conditioning

and exhaust systems that circulate over 2000 CFM of air. 6) Provide new flow, tamper, etc. devices on existing fire protection (sprinkler)

systems. Make requisite connections to new fire alarm system.

h. Emergency Power – Alternate Bid No. E-1

1) Provide new natural gas-fired generator to serve emergency lighting and emergency power requirements of the facility.

2) Connect all lighting at egress points to the emergency power system. 3) Rework existing power and lighting as required accommodating emergency

power loads.

i. Fire Suppression (limited area for new additions)

1) Provide requisite fire alarm connections for flow, tamper, etc.

j. General Overview

1) Modify existing unit substation. Disconnect and remove certain existing feeders to panelboards. Extend new feeders to new panelboards as indicated.

2) Disconnect and remove certain panelboards as indicated. 3) Disconnect and remove branch circuits to electric unit heaters as indicated. 4) Provide new panelboards and extend new feeders thereto. 5) Provide new enclosed circuit breaker and new safety switches. 6) Extend new 120 volt branch circuits to certain mechanical equipment. 7) Disconnect and remove certain lighting fixtures. 8) Relocate certain lighting fixtures. 9) Provide certain new lighting fixtures. 10) Provide new time clock and lighting contractors as indicated. 11) Modify existing emergency lighting system. 12) Make connections to new direct digital control system and between direct

digital control system and various items of mechanical and electrical equipment.

13) Perform certain specialized Electric Work for the following other trades. Where a number exists in parenthesis, this number references the specification section where the work is described. Note, this listing is by no means meant to include each minute detail, but it is intended to alert the Electric Contractor to certain items. This contractor shall review each other division of work to ascertain the scope of electric work specified therein:

a) Plumbing Division i. Extend circuits to sump pump.





b) Fire Protection Division ii. Extend wiring from flow switches to fire alarm system monitor

module. iii. Extend wiring from tamper switches to fire alarm system

monitor module.

c) HVAC iv. Extend branch circuits to new radiant heater mixing blocks. v. Extend branch circuit to new exhaust fans. vi. Extend wiring from fire alarm devices to smoke dampers.

d) Direct Digital Control Division vii. Extend 120 volt circuit to all direct digital control enclosures. viii. Extend requisite conduit and wiring to remote sensors, motor

control centers, etc. as indicated on the input/output schedules and as necessary for complete operation of the system.

ix. Make connections at given digital control devices. Connections at digital control panels shall be performed by the Direct Digital Control Contractor.

B. The existing campus will be occupied and will remain in operation throughout the period that this work is being performed, and certain new work will be performed during this period. Unscheduled interruptions of the medium voltage electric service will not be tolerated. The contractor shall exercise extreme caution, shall thoroughly inform his workmen and subcontractors of the critical nature of this work, and shall continually review the work procedure being followed in order to prevent accidental interruption of service. Before performing any act which could result in interruption of service, the contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer of the hazards involved and the contractor shall proceed in a manner and at a time specifically approved by the Owner and Engineer.

C. All work necessitating the temporary turning off or shutting down the operation of existing mechanical and/or electrical facilities shall be done at times specifically approved by the Owner and Engineer in advance of any disruption of existing facilities.

1. Addition of new systems shall include the requisite rigging, wrecking, hauling, protection of permanent equipment and the building structures, and cleaning up. Care shall be exercised to keep dust and dirt to a minimum. All debris shall be promptly removed.

D. Excavation And Backfilling And Restoration Of Surfaces


E. Guarantee


F. Equipment

1. Any and all costs associated with piping, electric, wiring, conduit, supports, pads, or other modifications to accommodate installation for manufacturer=s equipment that differs from equipment layout on drawings shall be included on contractor=s bid. The





contractor is responsible to insure that the equipment will fit within space allocated with appropriate clearances for maintenance, operation, servicing, and code.






BLANK PAGE




COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL260500 - 1

SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.





C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:


2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants".





J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using [steel] [cast-iron] pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."





LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

260519 - 1

SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

1.3 DEFINITIONS



1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for





260519 - 2

intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Allied. 5. Cablec. 6. Cornish. 7. Hi-Tech. 8. Pirelli. 9. Techbestos.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN and RHH-RHW-USE.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain





260519 - 3

ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

2.4 SLEEVE SEALS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.


2. Pressure Plates: Stainless Steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTORS MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. All conductors shall be copper. All wire and cable No. 6 AWG and smaller shall be factory color-coded; all larger wire and cable shall be identified with colored tape encircling the wire or cable. Wire and cable color code shall conform to requirements of Section 260553.

B. All branch circuit wire in channels or wireways in lighting fixtures shall be Type THHN, stranded.

C. All fixture wire (to a single fixture) in channels or wireways in lighting fixtures shall be Type AF, stranded.

D. All other 6 AWG, and smaller wiring shall be Type THHN, stranded.

E. All other 4 AWG and larger wiring shall be Type RHH-RHW-USE, stranded.





260519 - 4

3.2 SIZE OF CONDUCTORS

A. The sizes of all light and power mains and feeders are indicated and no reduction in sizes of any main or feeder will be permitted under any circumstances. All branch lighting circuits and miscellaneous wiring shall be not less than No. 12 AWG wire; control wires shall be not less than No. 14 wires; on appliance and 208/120 volts circuits, if the single distance to the first outlet exceeds 50 feet, the minimum size for this run shall be No. 10 AWG to the first outlet.

3.3 WIRING

A. All feeders and branch circuit wiring throughout the buildings shall consist of insulated wires installed in conduit as indicated on the drawings.

B. All wires of one feeder or circuit must be run in the same conduit and shall be different colors conforming with Section 260553.

C. All wires shall be installed continuous from outlet to outlet, with no splices except in outlet or junction boxes.

D. All joints shall be made using solderless lugs and/or connectors of sufficient size to enclose all strands of the conductors. Thoroughly clean wire before installing so joints will carry full capacity of wire with no perceptible temperature rise. Connectors for No. 8 AWG and larger shall be Burndy Engineering Co. No. KVSW34, Thomas and Betts Co., or equal, of two bolt parallel groove type with spacer. Connectors for No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be Ideal Industries Wingnuts, 3M Electrical Products insulated Skotchlok, or Thomas and Betts Piggy Pigtails. Bolted connectors shall be thoroughly taped with 3M Electrical Products No. 33 Scotch electrical tape. Wire nuts will not be approved.

E. Proper taped ends of sufficient length shall be provided at all outlets where fixtures are to be mounted, so there will be no difficulty in wiring fixtures.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."





260519 - 5


A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."



D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Edit paragraph below as required for Project design conditions and seismic-criteria status.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.





260519 - 6


A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.





GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260526 - 1

SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.


A. Building Ground

1. New panelboards, starters, motors, lighting fixtures, receptacles, conduits, boxes, and other equipment shall be properly grounded in accordance with the latest rules and regulations of the National Electrical Code.

2. From unit substation within conduit for all new feeders, extend ground conductor to new panelboards.

3. Within branch circuit conduits and raceways to motors, install ground conductor from motor control center and new starters to frames of motors.

4. Within new and existing branch circuit conduits and raceways to all new convenience receptacles, computer, and appliance receptacles, extend new ground conductor from panelboard ground bus to ground terminal on receptacles.

5. Within conduit to any new or relocated lighting fixtures, provide ground conductor and connect same to fixture.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Ground rods. 2. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 3. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.

C. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.






E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals:

1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at ground rings based on NETA MTS.

a. Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if they do not.

b. Include recommended testing intervals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.


C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in

diameter. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-

5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, as detailed on drawings.





2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install conductor as indicated on drawings.

B. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus on insulated spacers 1 inch, minimum, from wall 6 inchesabove finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect to horizontal bus.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.





7. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units.

C. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a grounding bus.

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor





conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

B. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod assembly. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

C. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s). 5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.






BLANK PAGE




HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260529 - 1

SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the





following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. :


a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation. d. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.





D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.





B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.


A. Hangers under new concrete construction shall be supported by concrete inserts, Grinnell Fig. 282, Fee and Mason, or Gateway, malleable iron body and nut. Where additional supports are required, install, per manufacturer=s installation instructions and load ratings (with 5:1 safety factor) Rawl or Hilti expansion bolts.

B. Hangers under existing concrete construction shall be supported by Rawl or Hilti expansion bolts installed per manufacturer's installation instructions and load ratings (with 5:1 safety factor) and placed horizontally in side of concrete joists where possible and installed in concrete slabs at other locations.

C. Adjacent to concrete and block construction, hangers shall be supported by Rawl or Hilti expansion bolts installed per manufacturer's installation instructions and load ratings (with 5:1 safety factor).

D. Under steel beam construction, hangers shall be supported by beam clamps, Grinnell Fig. 218, Fee and Mason, or Gateway malleable iron jaws with steel rod and nut. Where intermediate support between beams is required, contractor shall weld angle iron supports between beam or joists, top of angles being level with top of building steel.

E. Under bar joist construction, hangers shall be supported by beam clamps, Grinnell Fig. 218, Fee and Mason, or Gateway malleable iron jaws with steel rod and nut. Where intermediate support between beams is required, contractor shall weld angle iron supports between beam or bar joists, top of angles being level with top of building steel.

F. Any cutting and patching required to install hangers, supports, rods, or inserts shall be performed by this contractor

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps.





D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 3. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

4. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 5. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 6. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.





3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.


2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.





RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260533 - 1

SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.


1. Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

G. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

I. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.





C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC, plumbing, and Fire Protection items and architectural features in the paths of

conduit groups with common supports.

D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

E. Source quality-control test reports.



B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 3. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 4. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 5. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

D. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

E. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

F. FMC: aluminum.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.





H. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Fittings for EMT: Die-cast type. 2. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with

overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

I. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 2. CANTEX Inc. 3. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 4. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 5. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 6. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 7. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. ENT: NEMA TC 13.

C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

D. LFNC: UL 1660.

E. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

F. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Hoffman. 4. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 6. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 7. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 8. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 9. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.





B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

E. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.

F. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.

J. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.4 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.


C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

2.5 SLEEVE SEALS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.





2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.


2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Certain conduits for ground conductors shall be PVC, rigid, Schedule 80 heavy wall plastic conduit.

B. All underground conduit encased in concrete shall be PVC, Schedule 40, heavy wall plastic conduit.

C. All underground conduit not encased in concrete shall be PVC, rigid, Schedule 80 heavy wall plastic conduit.

D. All exposed conduits outside the building shall be aluminum rigid conduit of full card weight and dimensions.

E. All exposed conduit, smaller than 2" including feeder conduit and all concealed conduit installed in concrete, shall be mild steel rigid conduit (RMC).

F. All other conduit, concealed or exposed including feeder conduit which is 2" and larger, shall be Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) or aluminum rigid metallic conduit.

G. All conduit concealed within walls or above suspended ceilings smaller than 2”, shall be Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) OR electrical metallic tubing (EMT). EMT conduit must have approved fittings. Set screw type will not be accepted.

H. Conduit between lighting fixtures and adjacent outlet box shall be flexible galvanized steel conduit. All other flexible conduit, at motor connections, and elsewhere where flexibility is required, shall be Anaconda "Sealtite", or approved equivalent, liquid tight polyvinyl jacketed flexible conduit consisting of zinc plated steel strips helically wound around copper ground wire, rigidly joined, and finished to provide smooth inside surface.

I. No conduit shall be less than 3/4” nominal size.





3.2 FITTINGS

A. All exposed conduit work shall be run in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to walls of building and plumb on walls and fitted on the walls throughout.

B. On conduits 1-1/4" or larger, use insulated metallic bushings. Use approved liquid tight type fittings to terminate liquid tight flexible conduit.

C. Indenter or die cast set screw type will not be accepted.

3.3 OUTLET BOXES FOR FIXTURES, SWITCHES, ETC.

A. Outlet boxes shall be pressed steel, at least 1-1/2" deep, all thoroughly galvanized, each especially suited for the number and type of wiring device to be installed or service required. Boxes in masonry walls, signal outlets, etc. shall be not less than 4" square and 1-1/2" deep; boxes for telephone outlets shall be 4-11/16" square x 2-1/8" deep. Boxes shall be secured to conduit system by bushings and double locknuts and during construction the conduit ends shall be kept sealed until wire is pulled.

B. All outlet boxes shall be of one piece construction and arranged to set flush with adjoining finish. Raised cover plates shall be used where necessary. The use of sectional boxes will not be permitted. This contractor shall be held responsible for the correct position of all outlet boxes and where same are built in masonry walls he shall see that the outlet boxes are brought to the finish line.

C. Provide boxes with 3/8" fixture studs where necessary. All outlet boxes shall not be less than the minimum size required by NEC Article 370 at each location to accommodate wires, switches, receptacles, etc., without crowding.

D. Outlet boxes shall be supported in masonry or concrete walls or shall be rigidly supported from building structure independent of conduit system.

E. Boxes feeding recessed lighting fixtures in suspended lay-in ceilings shall be installed within 3'-0" of fixture and shall be accessible through removable ceiling panels. Fixture shall be connected to outlet box with fixture conductors and ground wire installed in 3/4" flexible conduit. Flexible conduit shall be not longer than 6'-0" long.

F. On exposed work, use cast boxes as hereinbefore specified under "Fittings". In runs of plastic conduit, use PVC boxes with TayMac Corporation covers.

3.4 LOCATION OF OUTLETS

A. Where the exact location of lights depend upon the spacing of the beams, paneling, etc., the contractor shall determine the exact location after consulting building detail plans. Exact location of all outlets shall be determined from the dimensioned drawings, not scaled from the blueprints.





B. Where outlets are indicated in panels, they shall be truly centered and outlets in any one room or hall shall be in correct alignment, unless otherwise shown. Where outlets occur in sound insulated ceilings, they shall be centered accurately with individual tiles of insulation.

C. Changing outlets to a position as required in order to locate them properly, to fit paneling, decoration, cases, etc., shall be done as part of this contract. The exact location of all outlets and switches shall be governed entirely by the requirements of other work which is placed in connection with these outlets.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, the dimension from the finished floor shall be as follows:

1. Switch outlets shall be located as close to openings where shown on plans with bottom 4'-0" above floor.

2. Wall mounted telephone outlets shall be located with centerline 4'-6" above floor. 3. Unless otherwise shown, convenience outlets shall be installed with bottom 16" above

floor with long dimension vertical unless otherwise shown. 4. Manual fire alarm station outlets shall be located as close to openings where shown on

the plans with bottom 3'-6" above floor. 5. Fire alarm annunciator outlets shall be installed with bottom 5'-0" above floor with long

dimension horizontal unless otherwise shown. 6. Fire alarm audible and visual appliances shall be installed with bottom 6'-8" above floor. 7. All other outlets not mentioned above shall be located where directed by the Engineer.

3.5 CONTROL OF OUTLETS

A. All branch lighting and appliance circuits shall be controlled by circuit breakers at the various distribution cabinets.

B. Certain light outlets shall be controlled by wall switches as indicated on plans. Where one switch is indicated, it shall control all lights in the room. Where more than one switch is indicated, the various outlets are designated with letters and/or numbers corresponding to the switch designation. Where no switch is indicated, outlets shall be controlled by circuit breakers in the light panels.

C. Convenience receptacles shall have no intermediate control between cabinets and outlets.

D. The control of other outlets not mentioned above shall be controlled as directed by the Engineer.

3.6 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

A. This contract includes all the necessary junction and pull boxes that may be required for pulling or splicing cables to make the conduit system practical. These boxes shall be constructed of code gauge steel, galvanized all over, and of ample size to turn or support cables and with screw or hinged covers as conditions demand. Wall mounted pull boxes shall set flush with finished walls and shall be provided with trims the same as lighting cabinets; covers on other boxes shall be secured with silicon bronze screws. Cables of each circuit shall be bound together with cabling twine and adequately supported.





3.7 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

L. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:

1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway

unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

M. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a





blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

N. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.

1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation:

125 deg F temperature change.

2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change.

3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.

O. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 60 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

P. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

Q. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

R. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."




RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260533 - 10

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.


A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."



D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and one or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."





260533 - 11

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.


A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.11 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.12 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.






260533 - 12

BLANK PAGE




IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260553 - 1

SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification of power and control cables. 2. Identification for conductors. 3. Underground-line warning tape. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Equipment identification labels. 6. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.





1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.2 COLOR CODING AND IDENTIFICATION OF WIRE AND CONDUCTORS

A. All new wire and cable No. 6 AWG and smaller shall be factory color-coded; all larger wire and cable shall be identified at all terminations and in all pull boxes with colored tape encircling the wire or cable. A separate color for each phase shall be used consistently throughout. The following color coding shall be used:

1. 208/120 volt systems - - - - - Black (Ph.A), Red (Ph.B), Blue (Ph.C), White (Neutral)

2. Control Wiring - - - - - - - - - Yellow 3. Ground conductors - - - - - - - Green

B. Feeders shall be identified by color only; branch circuits and control wiring shall be identified by color and identifying number. Before identifying any wires, contractor shall obtain Engineer's approval of system to be followed. In general, wiring shall be identified as follows:

1. Each new wire supplied from a lighting or appliance panel shall have an identifying number at each end of wire, the identifying number being the same as circuit number





appearing on the electrical drawings and the same as the panel circuit number. Where required for clarity, identification shall also include panel number.

2. Each new branch motor circuit wire shall have an identifying number at each end of wire, the identifying number being the same as terminal number to which wire is connected.

3. Each new control wire shall have an identifying number at each end of wire. Where possible, the identifying number shall be the same as terminal to which wire is connected, with an additional letter subscript to identify each individual wire. No two wires shall have the same identification. At the completion of the project, contractor shall deliver to Engineer a set of sepia tracings of equipment showing the identifying numbers of each wire. Where required for clarity, identification shall also include equipment designation

2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.





B. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch.

2.6 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color: Black.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.





D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

G. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.

H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Stenciled legend 4 inches (100 mm) high. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.





2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. e. Enclosed switches. f. Enclosed circuit breakers. g. Enclosed controllers. h. Push-button stations. i. Power transfer equipment. j. Contactors. k. Power-generating units.





COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL260800 - 1

SECTION 26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a summary of all commissioning of Electrical Systems.


1.3 DEFINITIONS




D. DDC: Direct Digital Controls.

E. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.


A. Prepare and assist the CxA for commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA.

B. Attend construction phase electrical coordination meeting.

C. Participate in Electrical systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.

D. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation.

E. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period.





F. Resolve all deficiencies identified in Commissioning Report. Contractor shall prepare written response that all items are resolved based on Commissioning Report.

G. Sample Commissioning Reports have been included at the end of this Section.


A. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for actual Electrical systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be furnished and installed as part of the construction contract.


C. Provide test data, inspection reports, and certificates in Systems Manual.





3. Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's prestart and startup checklists for Electrical systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be verified and tested.


5. Certificate of readiness certifying that Electrical systems, subsystems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing.

6. Test and inspection reports and certificates. 7. Corrective action documents.

1.7 SUBMITTALS




PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Certify that Electrical systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and





started and are operating according to the Contract Documents.

B. Certify that Electrical instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded.

C. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).

D. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists.

E. Check safety cutouts, alarms, flow and tamper switches, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during each mode of operation.

F. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA.

3.2 TESTING VERIFICATION


B. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of Electrical systems at the direction of the CxA.

1. Failure of an item includes, other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final testing. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 dB shall result in rejection of final testing. Variations in background noise must be considered.




B. Scope of Electrical testing shall include entire Electrical installation.

C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of fire alarm system.

D. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.

E. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.





F. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical.

G. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.

H. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the Electrical system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.

I. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.

3.4 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES

A. The following Electrical system shall be commissioned:

1. Fire Alarm System. 2. Emergency Generator (Alternate Bid E-1). 3. New Light Fixtures. 4. Interface with Fire Protection System. 5. Interface with all HVAC&R Equipment. 6. Interface with all DDC Controls.




Project:

Date: Building:

Location:





Start-Up Plan


Checklists



TAB

Start-Up Witness

Test Procedure

Other Retest

Other Training


Approval Dates




Start-Up Plan


Checklists



TAB

Start-Up Witness

Test Procedure





Date:

Building:

Location:











with the equipment.



Agenda.


















Comments:

Training Methods.






Written handouts

Classroom lecture


Video presentation


Comments:




LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES260923 - 1

SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. The contractor shall furnish and install a lighting control system complete with cabinet, microprocessor controlled relay panels with electrically held, electrically latched relays controlled via switches, occupancy sensors, etc.

B. The lighting control system shall be complete in all details, shall be factory assembled and tested. Electric Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor and supervision to erect the equipment on proper supports. The lighting control system shall fully integrate with the Direct Digital Control System.

C. The start-up of the lighting control system equipment shall be performed by the manufacturer and the cost of same shall be included in the Electric Contractor's proposal. The mechanic in charge of the crew performing the start-up of the lighting control system equipment shall be factory trained on the type of work to be performed and shall always be present while this work is being performed. All details of construction and installation shall meet the approval of the Engineer. Manufacturer shall provide, in addition, the operating instructions as hereinafter specified.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:

1. Time clock. 2. Lighting contactors.


1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. PIR: Passive infrared.





1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy sensors.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTING CONTACTORS

A. Electrically held, 120 volt AC coil, six (6) convertible contacts.

B. Relay contacts shall be individually replaceable. Relay terminal blocks shall be capable of accepting two (2) #12AWG wires on both the line and the load side.

C. Rated at 20 Amp, Tungsten, 30 Amp (fluorescent), 1 HP at 120 Vac.

D. NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosures.

E. Bids may be submitted on lighting contractors of Square D, Eaton or General Electric or approved equal manufacturer.

2.2 TIME CLOCK

A. Furnish and install where shown a photo/time control of the 7 day calendar dial type, which shall be suitable to operate mechanically-held contractor(s).

B. Photo/time control shall be prewired to a central terminal block which provides connecting terminals for photocontrol and independent contractor control circuit(s).





C. Time switch shall function to prevent energization of lighting for preset periods each day. Time switch dial shall permit different ON-OFF settings for each day of the week, with provision for omitting selected days.

D. Control shall include prewired manual switching for each contractor circuit specified.

E. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 surface.

F. Photocontrol to be remotely installed in appropriate outside location. It shall be fully temperature compensated and shall provide for time delay of at least 15 seconds to prevent false switching. Photocontrol shall operate control center to energize whenever natural lighting falls below 1.5 – 5.5 foot-candles turn on.

G. Spring driven reserve timing motor shall be provided sufficient to operate time switch controls at least 24 hours after power failure. On restoration of power, time switch shall transfer to synchronous motor drive and automatically rewind reserve.

H. Bids may be submitted on time clocks of Tork, Intermatic, Hubbell, or approved equal manufacturer.

2.3 WIRING

A. All wiring shall be in strict accordance with the National Electrical Code, and applicable state and local regulations. Wire sizes shall be as shown on the drawings and shall comply with the manufacturer=s specifications for apparatus employed in the system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

B. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.





B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.

2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.

B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.





PANELBOARDS262416 - 1

SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.





5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.






A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F to plus 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.



1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:

Two spares for each panelboard. 3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and

type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for

each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.

3. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel with door and door, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized Steel. c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective

devices and other components.

4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

C. Incoming Mains Location: as shown on drawings.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate

at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.





2.2 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Lug only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Door in door type, provide doors with hinge for easy access. Key all doors alike.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

B. Mount top of trim 72 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.





G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.



2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record





for device.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.






BLANK PAGE




WIRING DEVICES262726 - 1

SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Communications outlets. 3. Floor service outlets, and poke-through assemblies.


1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.






E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described in subparagraphs below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Occupancy Sensors: one for every 10 of each type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 WIRING DEVICES

A. Furnish and install the following wiring devices at the locations indicated on the drawings by the Standard Wiring Symbols. All wiring devices shall be Arrow-Hart, Bryant, Hubbell, Pass and Seymour/Legrand, or equal make, and equal in capacity, quality, and type of the following plate numbers:

1. Single pole switches, 20A, 120/277V: Hubbell No. 1221-I.





2. Single pole (locking type) switches, 20A, 120/277V: Hubbell No. 1221-L. 3. Three-way switches, 20A, 120/277V: Hubbell No. 1223-I. 4. Maintained contact switches, SP/DT, 20A, 120/277V: Hubbell No. 1395-I. 5. Ground fault interrupting receptacles, 20A, 125V, 2P, 3W, Grd.: Hubbell No. HGF8300-

I. 6. NEMA 5-20R non-locking receptacles, 20A, 125V, 2P, 3W, Grd.: Hubbell No. 8300-I. 7. Wall telephone outlets: Outlet box with blank cover, 1-1/4" hole. 8. Occupancy sensor wall switch, 600W, 120V dual technology (passive infrafred and

ultrasonic) 1,000 sq. ft. coverage Hubbell No. ATD1277I. 9. Other outlets: As indicated on drawings.

2.3 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS

A. Telephone Outlet:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 3560-6. b. Leviton; 40649.

2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.

2.4 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed

and labeled for use in "wet locations."

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices: Ivory, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inchesin length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.





E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99. 2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar





problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.





ENGINE GENERATOR (ALTERNATE BID)263213 - 1

SECTION 26 32 13 ENGINE GENERATOR (ALTERNATE BID)

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. The Electric Contractor shall furnish and install one new automatic natural gas generator set, including all auxiliaries, as shown on the drawings and hereinafter specified.

B. The contractor shall deliver the generator set to the building, shall include in his bid all local freight, hauling, and rigging, shall furnish all necessary labor and supervision to erect the equipment on proper foundations and/or supports, and shall perform all grouting required. After piping and electric connections have been made, the contractor shall test and shall place generator set in operation.

C. The new generator set shall be of the unit type consisting of a natural gas engine, generator, enclosure, lubrication system, manufacturer shall also furnish all requisite auxiliary equipment for the generator including radiator, exhaust manifold guards, electrical control equipment, starting equipment, silencers, flexible exhaust couplings, fuel lines, isolators, batteries, charger, and cables connecting starting batteries to the engine. Engine, generator, radiator, exhaust manifold, fuel lines, etc. shall be factory assembled and shipped as a unit with supports for field mounted equipment.

D. The start-up of the generator set shall be performed by the manufacturer, the cost of which shall be included in his proposal. The mechanic in charge of the crew performing the start-up of the generator set shall be factory-trained in the assembly and start-up of this type of equipment and shall always be present during start-up period. All details of construction and installation shall meet the approval of the Engineer.

E. The equipment shall comply with the specification herein, shall be the product of a reputable manufacturer, and shall operate at the manufacturer's standard ratings, in all respects. All parts shall be suited to the service and not subject to injury under any condition that may occur in the normal operation of the system.

F. The entire installation shall comply with all local laws, laws of the State of Ohio, and the National Electrical Code

1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency power supply with the following features:





1. Natural gas engine. 2. Unit mounted cooling system. 3. Unit mounted control and monitoring. 4. Performance requirements for sensitive loads. 5. Load banks.


1. Division 26 Section "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the following:

1. Thermal damage curve for generator.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other components specified.

2. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Source quality-control test reports.

1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report. 2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not

identical, to those tested on prototype unit. 3. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of

compliance with specified requirements. 4. Report of sound generation. 5. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations. 6. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.






E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 50 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL), and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

F. Comply with ASME B15.1.

G. Comply with NFPA 37.

H. Comply with NFPA 70.

I. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable federal, state and local government requirements.

J. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation.






A. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:

1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C. Delete first subparagraph below for outdoor units.

2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 980 feet.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 24 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.



1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each. 2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each. 3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Kohler Co.; Generator Division. 2. Caterpillar; Engine Div. 3. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.

2.2 Basis of Design: Kohler 25REZG 25KW.

A. The engine, generator and all major items of auxiliary equipment shall be products of U.S. manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment, and shall be assembled, tested, and shipped to the job site by the engine manufacturer or his authorized distributor maintaining a parts and service facility in the area.

B. Each bidder shall submit to the Engineer, prior to the bid date, complete data including manufacturer=s model number, physical data including overall dimensions and weights, printed ratings, all major auxiliary equipment, and performance data on equipment bid upon. Any proposed deviations from this specification shall be clearly stated.

C. Rating: Each natural gas engine generator set shall be 1800 RPM, naturally aspirated, 4 cycle, with .80 PF, 208/120 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz, 1800 RPM generator, rated as hereinafter scheduled when engine is supplied with natural gas at 7-11 inches H20. Ratings shall represent net power available after deducting all engine-driven or motor-driven accessories. Fuel consumption shall be certified within 5% by the engine manufacturer and be based on 93% generator efficiency and engine fan cooling losses as hereinafter scheduled.

D. Engine: The engine shall be a spark ignition natural gas, four stroke cycle, water cooled, I-4 inline type. The engine shall meet specifications when operating on natural gas fuel. The engine shall be equipped with lube oil, and intake air filters, lube oil cooler, and any attachments required for continued dependable operation.

2.3 GENERATOR

A. The generator shall be of twelve (12) lead reconnectible, equivalent to Kohler 4P4 alternator, 2/3 pitch design, 3 phase Wye configuration and sized to provide the specified output under job site conditions, and shall be built to NEMA MG-1 Parts 16 and 22 standards with high temperature UL 1446 Class H insulation in stator and rotor, shall be single bearing, rotating field synchronous type with solid-state permanent magnet brushless exciter and voltage regulator components capable of automatically maintaining the voltage regulation within plus or minus .25%. Provide readily accessible voltage level, voltage gain, and voltage droop controls. Temperature rise, at rated standby power load, 0.8 P.F., shall not exceed NEMA Class H limits of 130 C. rise by resistance.





B. The generator, exciter, and controls shall be factory wired and tested as a complete unit. In addition to electrical tests, the generator shall be given a 25% overspeed test.

C. The generator exciter shall be a PMG brushless unit with a three phase, full wave rotating rectifier assembly using hermetically sealed metallic type silicon diodes to supply main field excitation. The generator exciter shall sustain short circuit current at 300% for not less than 10 seconds on either single-phase or three-phase faults.

D. Cast iron generator frames and end brackets shall be used. All ventilating air openings shall be screened and the generator shall be drip proof per NEMA standards.

E. The entire insulation system of the generator shall be NEMA Class H or higher, and shall be of non-organic, non-hydroscopic materials. Temperature rise shall be within NEMA MG-1-22.40 and 16.40 for all nameplate voltages at rated full load.

F. Bearings shall be anti-friction type. Provisions for adding and/or changing grease shall be provided.

G. The generator ventilating air shall enter the connection end and exhaust through the driven end of the unit. The ventilating fan shall be a one piece, cast unit mounted on the drive end of the generator shaft and shall be separately and self-supported.

H. The main rotating field shall consist of one piece of four pole laminations, shrunk fit and keyed to the shaft. No dovetails, cross bolts, or other pole-to-shaft connecting means are acceptable. The rotating field winding shall be wet wound with thermo-setting epoxy between each winding layer and over the completed winding.

I. The exciter rotor shall consist of individually insulated steel laminations stacked and rigidly held to a sleeve for mounting to the main shaft to allow maximum exciter serviceability. The exciter rotor shall be outboard of the front bearing. The rotor shall be dynamically balanced within 0.0005" peak to peak amplitude displacement at both ends of shaft. Exciter overload protection shall be provided.

J. The main generator stator shall consist of precision punched, individually insulated, steel laminations. The cast iron frame shall be shrunk fit and doweled to the stator assembly. The stator shall be of form wound construction and shall receive a full vacuum pressure impregnation in 100% semi-rigid epoxy resin.

K. The voltage regulator shall be a PMG type unit, epoxy coated, with 3 phase sensing, using silicon controlled rectifiers, with built-in protection for operation at less than normal speed (1800 RPM). Voltage regulation shall be plus or minus .25% or better from no load to full load with steady state modulation of 1/2%. A means for voltage adjustment shall be included as standard, to provide plus or minus 5% voltage adjustment.

2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKER

A. 100 Ampere, 3 pole.





2.5 ACCESSORIES: The following features and accessories shall be included for the generator set:

A. 12 volt direct current electric starting motor and drive

B. Oil filter and air filter.

C. High capacity radiator mounted on engine complete with fan of capacity hereinafter scheduled, engine driven circulating pump, thermostat, liquid-level switch to sense loss of coolant, and cooling system solution of 25% ethylene glycol plus rust inhibitor. Cooling system shall permit safe engine operation at 122 F ambient.

D. One Chromalox, or equal, jacket water heater with thermostat of size and with voltage rating hereinafter scheduled.

E. Flexible piping connectors for fuel connection.

F. One Silex, Ralco, or equal, 2.5" diameter stainless steel flexible exhaust coupling with ASA flanged ends of proper length to mate with engine outlet and silencer.

G. One Silex or Maxim “critical” grade size 2.5" diameter exhaust steel silencer with end inlet/end outlet and 1/2" drain connection.

H. Manifold, guard for manifold and flexible exhaust couplings.

I. One (1) Interstate or approved equal Model 31 Series low maintenance/high output, 12 volt, lead-acid starting batteries each rated 630 cold cranking amperes.

J. One battery charging alternator with automatic voltage regulator to recharge the cranking batteries during operation and to provide power for accessories normally supplied with the unit.

K. Battery box with restraining bracket within the engine generator set base and welding type battery cables connected to engine.

L. One (1) La Marche Model A46-6-12V-A1-16E, 12 volt, 6 ampere high-low rate battery charger. Provide A.C. power failure relay, and low and high D.C. voltage alarm relays; contacts to be dry, closed on failure.

M. Electronic load sharing governor.

N. Kohler Decision-Maker 550 microprocessor-based generator set monitoring, metering and control system: providing selectable cycle cranking control, with selectable number of cycles, “cranking” and “off” time periods, metric or imperial (English) measurement display, backlit panel and analog meters, engine speed idle function, engine speed ramping, voltage and speed adjustments and time delay start/stop functions. The entire control panel shall be impervious to water spray, dust and oil/exhaust residue and shall be capable of operating over an ambient temperature range of -40 F to 158 F and up to 95% RH (non-condensing). The control panel shall include:

1. Digital speed governor and digital voltage regulator functions. 2. Digital meters for AC voltage, frequency, percentage of current and percentage of load.





3. Digital LED display for oil pressure, oil temperature, water temperature, battery voltage, RPM, AC voltage, AC amperes, kilowatts, power factor, kilowatt-hours, running hours, number of starts counter, percent of governor duty, percent of regulator duty and frequency.

4. Oiltight, three-position “run-off-auto” selector switch with non-automatic indicator that flashes whenever the selector switch is not in the “auto” position.

5. Emergency stop Pushbutton. 6. Engine pre-alarm warning messages; engine does not stop.

a. Low oil pressure. b. High water temperature. c. Low water temperature. d. High battery voltage. e. Low battery voltage. f. Oil pressure sender fault. g. Oil temperature sender fault. h. Water temperature sender fault. i. Weak battery.

7. Engine shut-down and alarm messages; engine shall not restart on any failure without manual reset of control switch.

a. Low oil pressure. b. High water temperature. c. Low water level. d. Overcrank. e. Fail to crank. f. Overspeed. g. Magnetic pickup failure. h. Over/under voltage. i. Underfrequency. j. Main alternator short circuit. k. Magnetic pickup failure. l. Emergency stop pushbutton.

O. Remote Annunciator Panel

1. Furnish and install where shown in the building an NFPA 99-110 CSA 282 remote annunciator panel, providing (16) status and alarm points associated with generator at a remote location, via a data cable from the generator control panel.

2.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials and Workmanship: All materials, equipment, and parts comprising the generator set(s) specified herein shall be new and unused, of current manufacture and of highest grade, free from all defects or imperfections affecting performance. Workmanship shall be of the highest grade in accordance with modern practice.





B. Design: The design and construction of the generator set(s) shall be such that it is neat and clean in appearance, and that normal adjustment and maintenance can be effected without the use of special tools.

C. Shop Drawings: The manufacturer shall submit complete shop drawings sufficient to define the installation including piping connections, wiring and control diagrams, and wiring interconnections. Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner suitable for reproduction on 24" x 36" prints. All wiring shall be numbered; drawings shall show all numbering. A schematic drawing shall be furnished. A complete and detailed wiring diagram shall be furnished showing point to point wiring, wire numbering, terminal wiring, complete itemized parts list with catalog and manufacturer. A detailed circuit description write-up detailing complete operation, normal automatic operation, manual operation, all alarm conditions, and sequence of operations shall be furnished.

D. Warranty: Equipment furnished under this section for standby applications shall be guaranteed against defective parts or workmanship for a period of two (2) years or 1,000 hours whichever occurs first.

E. Lube Oil: Manufacturer shall completely fill the lube oil system with proper oil and shall maintain oil level for a period of 100 operating hours or one year, whichever comes first.

F. Coolant: Manufacturer shall completely fill the coolant system with a 25% mixture of Prestone, or equal, ethylene glycol product rust inhibitor, and water; and contractor shall maintain full systems with same concentration for 100 operating hours or one year, whichever comes first.

G. Tests: Each generator set shall receive the manufacturer=s standard testing, factory load testing, and witnessed job site load bank testing. Load banks and connections thereto shall be provided by this manufacturer. Prior to acceptance of the installation, the equipment shall be tested as indicated above to show it will start automatically, subjected to full load test, shut down and reset as required in these specifications. Prior to acceptance, any defects which become evident during these tests shall be corrected by the manufacturer at his expense. The test for each generator set shall include not less than the following:

1. Start set and bring up to rated no-load speed in the time recommended by the engine supplier.

2. Check manual and voltage regulator voltage range. 3. Record no-load reading of: A.C. volts, frequency, speed, all thermometers and pressure

gauges, and ambient temperature. 4. Perform the following tests at 0.8 P.F. for factory test and at unity power factor for job

site tests:

a. Record transient response of the set in quarter-load steps from no-load to full-load and from full-load to no-load.

b. Record transient response of the set in one step from no-load to full-load and from full-load to no-load.

c. At 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, and full-load record: A.C. volts, A.C. amperes, KW, frequency, speed, all thermometers and pressure gauges, and ambient temperature.

5. Apply 100 percent load at unity power factor for four hours and record at 15 minute intervals the same items listed Paragraph 4c.





H. Start-up and Instructions: On completion of installation, the initial start-up shall be performed by a factory-trained representative of the engine supplier. At the time of start-up, operating instruction and maintenance procedures shall be thoroughly explained to operating personnel. Three (3) copies of operating and maintenance instruction booklets shall be supplied for the generator set and such auxiliary equipment may require same. Supplier of the generator set shall have a parts and service facility with 24-hour answering service.

I. Installation Work: The Electric contractor shall take delivery of each generator set and accessories, shall subcontract to an approved rigging firm for all rigging and work required to move and set each generator set on its foundation and vibration mountings, and shall perform any other incidental on-site work to ready the equipment for operation or to protect same during construction. All work shall comply with the manufacturer=s standards and installation instructions.

2.7 SCHEDULE OF ENGINE GENERATOR SET

A. Refer to the following schedule. SCHEDULE OF NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR SET (Quantity: 1)

Rating:

Generator Data: Standby Power, KW 25 KW Standby Power, KVA 31 KVA Motor Starting KVA (30% voltage dip ) 121 KVA Circuit Breaker Calibration 100A/3P

Engine Data: Aspiration Natural Fan CFM 7100 CFM Combustion Air Requirements CFM 74 CFM No. Of Cylinders 4 Bore, Inches 4.00 IN. Stroke, Inches 3.60 IN. Displacement (cu. in.) 181

Fuel Consumption

Standby Rating, CFH @ 100% Load 366

Water Jacket Heater Size, KW 1.0 @ 120 V

Silencer Size, Type 2.5", Critical Grade Battery (Qty: 1)

Type Lead Antimony Capacity, Cold Cranking Amperes 630





Base Bid Manufacturer Data:

Manufacturer Kohler Model 25REZG

Enclosure Weatherproof (101” L x 53.6” H x 41” W)

With exhaust silencer mounted internal to enclosure UL 2200 Listed.

2.8 ENCLOSURES

A. For new generator, furnish and install the following generator enclosure:

1. Entire emergency generator set shall be mounted within a factory furnished, finished, weather-proof, rodent-proof enclosure constructed of 14 gauge galvanized, reinforced steel equipped with lockable doors where access is required, 120 volt A.C. block heater, cooling and combustion air intake opening, and radiator discharge opening. All openings shall be equipped with 12/” square heavy gauge mesh screening. Enclosure shall be cleaned and painted inside and outside with primer and two coats except fasteners shall be plated. Provide weatherproof access for conduit and wiring to supply power for heater and other devices requiring power when set is not operating.

2.9 FINISHES

A. Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.

1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.

B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests:

1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.

2. Full load run. 3. Maximum power. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Transient and steady-state governing. 6. Single-step load pickup. 7. Safety shutdown.





8. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine-generator installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.

B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.

C. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance.



3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" and Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."






A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection except those indicated to be optional for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.

3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions.

b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery.

c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.

4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging conditions.

5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

6. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. 7. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set

installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four locations on the property line, and compare measured levels with required values.

E. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

F. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request.





G. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

H. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

I. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

J. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

K. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.

L. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."





TRANSFER SWITCHES (ALTERNATE BID)263600 - 1

SECTION 26 36 00 TRANSFER SWITCHES (ALTERNATE BID)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

1. Automatic transfer switches.


A. Furnish and install the automatic transfer switches shown on the drawings and hereinafter specified. Each automatic transfer switch shall automatically transfer certain critical loads from the normal source to the emergency source upon failure of the normal source and shall automatically retransfer to the normal source upon restoration of the normal source.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.

1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, power sources, and load.

C. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,

including software, where applicable.






A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches and control panels through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Contactor Transfer Switches:

a. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division. b. Caterpillar; Engine Div. c. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP. d. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. e. Russelectric, Inc.

2.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Each automatic transfer switch shall be Kohler Model No. KCS-DCTA-0104S single motor operator, rating as scheduled, 3 pole, electrically operated, mechanically held automatic transfer switch arranged for 208/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 hertz normal and emergency power. The transfer switch shall be double throw, actuated by electrical operator(s) momentarily energized and connected to the transfer mechanism by a simple overcenter linkage.

B. Each automatic transfer switch shall be capable of transferring successfully in either direction with 70% of rated voltage applied to switch terminals. The complete automatic transfer switch assembly shall be listed under UL 1008 for use on emergency systems. Each automatic transfer switch shall have a 3 cycle short circuit closing and withstand rating of 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 208 volts A.C. when protected by 200 ampere, Class J fuses.

C. Each automatic transfer switch shall be equipped with the following accessories:





1. Adjustable close-differential 3 phase voltage sensing of the normal source, factory set to pick up at 90% and drop out at 80% of rated voltage; frequency sensing factory set to pick up at 90% and drop out at 70%.

2. Adjustable 1 phase voltage sensing of the emergency source, factory set to pick up at 90% and drop out at 80% of rated voltage; frequency sensing factory set to pick up at 90% and drop out at 70%.

3. Programmable 0 to 6 seconds adjustable time delay, factory set at 3 seconds for starting generator upon failure of any phase.

4. Programmable 0-9999 second time delay factory set at 1800 seconds (30 minutes) after restoration of all phases to delay retransfer to normal source. Time delay shall be bypassed if emergency source fails but normal source is available.

5. Load test toggle switch to simulate normal power failure. 6. Contacts (Quantity: 2) to close on failure of normal source. 7. Contacts (Quantity: 2) to open on failure of normal source. 8. Green LED to indicate when transfer switch is in normal position. 9. Amber LED to indicate normal power available. 10. Red LED to indicate when transfer switch is in emergency position. 11. Amber LED to indicate emergency power available. 12. Auxiliary contacts (Quantity 2), closed when transfer switch is in normal position. 13. Auxiliary contacts (Quantity 2), closed when transfer switch is in emergency position.

D. Each switch shall be equipped with wired and identified terminal strip to permit connection to diesel generators, and various items of Owner=s equipment.

E. Each transfer switch shall obtain its operating current from the source to which the load is being transferred. All relays, components, accessories, etc. shall be front accessible.

SCHEDULE OF AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

Name

Type

Enclosure

Ampere

Poles

Feeder Size

ATS No. 1 KCS NEMA Type 1 104 3 3-2 AWG & 1-8AWG, 1-1/2”C

2.3 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.

C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.





D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.

F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources.

1. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 2. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional

automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.

G. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at transfer switches for communicating with remote programming devices, annunciators, or annunciator and control panels shall have communication capability matched with remote device.

H. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated. 2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom

entrance of feeder conductors as indicated. 3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

I. Enclosures: NEMA type 1 for indoor location.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and





communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.


4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

5. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings. e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch

operations. f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer

time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

C. Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections:





1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.


3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings. e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch

operations. f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer

time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

D. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

E. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

F. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.





INTERIOR LIGHTING265100 - 1

SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports.


1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units.





3. Ballast. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Furnish data

required in "Submittals" Article in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

6. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Indicate sound power level and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

7. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 8. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture

type, outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer’s laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Installation instructions.

D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. 4. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Sprinklers. d. Smoke and fire detectors. e. Occupancy sensors. f. Access panels. g. AV/IT Equipment. h. HVAC diffusers.

5. Perimeter moldings.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.





F. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product manufacturer.

G. Field quality-control test reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers’ codes.

I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on drawings.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.

C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.





D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.

E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

H. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch with a weight of 8 ounces per square foot. No “hogged-out” or intermediate thickness lens will be accepted.

b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

I. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. “USE ONLY” and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc), tube configuration (twin, quad,

triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M47, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRT for all luminaires.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. General Requirement for Electronic Ballasts:

1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level

control is indicated. 4. Sound Rating: Class A.





5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 kHz or higher. 9. BF: 0.88 or higher. 10. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. 11. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall

be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. 10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum.

2.5 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single-lamp ballasts. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. 4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life. 5. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to

minimize audible fixture noise.

B. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F for single-lamp ballasts. 2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F. 3. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 4. Sound Rating: A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 15 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.





7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. 8. Power Factor: .90 or higher. 9. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 10. Protection: Class P thermal cutout. 11. Retain subparagraph and associated subparagraphs below for bi-level ballasts.

2.6 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

2.7 FLUORESCENT LAMPS Coordinate this Article with Drawings. Where color rendition or color uniformity is important and several types of fluorescent lamps are used, provide consistent manufacturer designations or ANSI lamp designations to define requirements. Specifying low-mercury lamps may change the color temperature. Low-mercury versions may not be available in all lamp categories. Consult manufacturers. Paragraphs and subparagraphs below are sample specifications for typical lamps, which are a few of the thousands of types and ratings available for building illumination. Indicate here or in Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule the standard designations of the lamps that meet lumen output, energy rating, CRI, color temperature, lamp life, and other requirements for specific Project applications. See Editing Instruction No. 10 in the Evaluations.

A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220 mm), 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches (610 mm), 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

C. T5 rapid-start lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches (1150 mm), 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3000 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

D. T5HO rapid-start, high-output lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches (1150 mm), 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated.

1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).





2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). 6. 57 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum). 7. 70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum).

2.8 HID LAMPS

A. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

B. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

C. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K.

D. Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI 78.41, CRI 0, and color temperature 1800 K.

2.9 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage. Coordinate first paragraph below with Drawings to identify humid spaces.

E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble,





clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Furnish and install the luminaires for all outlets shown on the drawings and as hereinafter specified, complete with all wiring connections and lamps. Luminaires shall conform with all provisions of this specification and where manufacturer's name and catalog number are specified, luminaire shall be named manufacturer's standard, modified if necessary to comply with any and all provisions of this specification.

D. Before delivery of the luminaires, the contractor shall check conditions at each outlet, each luminaire must be suitable for the conditions existing at each outlet; if shifting of outlets, lengthening of stems, etc. are necessary due to unavoidable confliction with other work, this contractor shall make such changes as directed by the Engineer without additional cost to the Owner.

E. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

2. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

F. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Each suspended fluorescent fixture shall be supported from two outlet boxes securely attached to building construction and each fitted with Appleton No. 8458R, Type SHC ball type swivel hanger cover and 1/2" conduit of proper length so that bottom of fixture will be 9'-0" above floor; however where the fixture run consists of more than two 4 foot or two 8 foot long fixtures the entire run shall be secured on 4 foot centers to Kindorf G-950, or equal, 12 gauge combination raceway and support system. All fittings necessary for the completion of the raceway shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories for the specific purpose for which they are used.

2. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 3. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 4. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 5. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to

building structure.

G. Air-Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.

H. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section “Identification for Electrical System.”






A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Verify that self-luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements in NFPA 101.

C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.

1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of the Architect.






BLANK PAGE




FIRE ALARM WORK280000 - 1

SECTION 28 00 00 FIRE ALARM WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes a summary of all Fire Alarm related work.


1. 280500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

2. 280513 – CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

3. 280800 – COMMISSIONING OF FIRE ALARM 4. 283112 – FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

C. Work by Others:


a. General Construction b. Plumbing Including Fire Suppression Work c. HVAC d. Electric e. Integrated Automation


A. Addition of New Fire Alarm Systems

1. The work under the Fire Alarm Equipment Supplier Contract shall be performed by Simplex in accordance with their State Term Pricing Contract.

2. The Electric Contractor shall provide all wiring (Section 28 05 13) and install all Fire Alarm Equipment shown on the plans and specified in Divisions 26 and 28. The Electric Contractor shall assist the Fire Alarm Equipment Supplier with check-out, start-up, and testing of the new Fire Alarm System.

3. The contract shall include new work as shown, specified, or required, and shall include, but not limited to, the following principal components:




FIRE ALARM WORK280000 - 2

a. Provide new fire alarm system equipment including all associated engineering, devices, annunciator, panels, extenders, amplifiers, permits, inspections, programming, testing, check-out, start-up, freight, warranties, etc.

B. The existing campus will be occupied and will remain in operation throughout the period that this work is being performed, and certain new work will be performed during this period. Unscheduled interruptions of the medium voltage electric service will not be tolerated. The contractor shall exercise extreme caution, shall thoroughly inform his workmen and subcontractors of the critical nature of this work, and shall continually review the work procedure being followed in order to prevent accidental interruption of service. Before performing any act which could result in interruption of service, the contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer of the hazards involved and the contractor shall proceed in a manner and at a time specifically approved by the Owner and Engineer.

C. All work necessitating the temporary turning off or shutting down the operation of existing mechanical and/or electrical facilities shall be done at times specifically approved by the Owner and Engineer in advance of any disruption of existing facilities.

1. Addition of new systems shall include the requisite rigging, wrecking, hauling, protection of permanent equipment and the building structures, and cleaning up. Care shall be exercised to keep dust and dirt to a minimum. All debris shall be promptly removed.

D. Excavation And Backfilling And Restoration Of Surfaces


E. Guarantee


F. Equipment






COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

280500 - 1

SECTION 28 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electronic safety and security equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electronic safety and security installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electronic safety and security equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.





280500 - 2

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electronic safety and security items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.


C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:









280500 - 3

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electronic safety and security equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PENETRATIONS

A. Electronic safety and security penetrations occur when raceways, pathways, cables, wireways, or cable trays penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.



D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.





280500 - 4

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants".

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.


A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electronic safety and security installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."





FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM283112 - 1

SECTION 28 31 12 FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Heat detectors. 5. Notification appliances. 6. Magnetic door holders. 7. Remote annunciator. 8. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.


A. The contractor shall furnish, install, test, and place in operation a complete, new, electronically operated, double supervised, closed circuit fire and smoke detection and alarm system. The new fire alarm system in this facility shall include all networking components and devices to integrate fire alarm panels located at Johnston Hall, Levey Hall, and Gardner Library into a complete networked fire alarm system. All units of equipment shall be located as shown on the plans and wired in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to make a complete and workable system. The system shall include one main fire control panel..

B. All units of equipment shall be Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual approved and listed and the entire installation shall comply with local and state codes, NFPA Standard 72, and shall be arranged to perform the functions hereinafter described and specified. In addition to the UL Listing on the individual components, the entire system, as installed, shall be UL Certified. A copy of the certification will be submitted to the owner after system is accepted.

C. The contractor shall install new Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP), remote LCD annunciators (ANN), complete with network communication wiring system. Refer to the drawings.

D. When the contractor has completed the installation of the new control panel, he shall place the new fire alarm system in operation and shall completely test the new fire alarm system functions.





1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Noncoded system, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level IV minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits. 3. Include battery size calculations. 4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that

each detector is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

6. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing zone designation of each device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.


E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01





Section "Operation and Maintenance Data, "deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction and include the following:

1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of

the same name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit. 7. Copy of NFPA 25.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level IV technician.

C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10. 2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer

than 1 unit. 3. Smoke and Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed,

but no fewer than 1 unit of each type. 4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but no

fewer than 1 unit of each type. 5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components. 6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.





7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International company (sole source).

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct smoke detectors. 5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 6. Fire standpipe system.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Valve supervisory switch. 2. Air duct detector (ACU).

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices. 3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. 5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. 8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunicator.

E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators.





2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Bids shall be based on a Simplex 4100U (sole source) solid state, microprocessor based, monitoring and control system with Style 7 communication for addressable devices and panel communication and Class A addressable notification appliance circuits. Equipment bid upon by each manufacturer shall comply with all requirements of this specification.

B. Equipment specification and conduit and wiring arrangement shown on the drawings are based on a Simplex system; bids shall include all items of labor, material, and equipment required for the installation of their equipment including all requisite changes in conduit, wiring, etc., and including the same quantity of spare wires originally indicated.

C. Documentation showing the systems ability to operate due to the failure of a control panel, network communication, network audio riser, addressable loop, device, or notification circuit. This document shall include a written description of the system operation during each of the above-mentioned failures and riser diagram showing alternate communication paths of each type of signaling line circuit.

2.4 COMPONENTS

A. All components of the fire and smoke detection and alarm system shall consist of the following types of Simplex Equipment:

1. No. 4100-9621 Fire Alarm Control Panel with Digital Voice: A fully field configurable and programmable solid-state microprocessor based monitoring and control system capable of being easily expanded up to a maximum of 2000 circuits in any combination of initiating device circuits, notification appliance circuits and addressable devices. Main Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be complete with, but not limited to, 80 character liquid crystal display, LED's, acknowledge, silence, and reset keys, function keys, programmable control keys, and microphone. Main Fire Alarm Control Panel shall have a digital audio control module which shall have the ability to control up to 8 channels of information simultaneously. Fire Alarm Panel shall be configured with, but not be limited to, IDNet and TRUEALARM interface modules for initiating device monitoring, remote unit interface modules to provide data communication channel to remotely located I/O panels, audio control modules, amplifiers, and pre-amplification of digitized alarm tones and voice messages to appropriate speaker circuits.

2. No. 4100-9052 Digital Alarm Communicating Transmitter (DACTL): capable of transmitting fire alarm activity using one of six major communication formats to a central supervising location. The communicator shall be UL864 listed as conforming to the requirements of NFPA 72 for central station connections and shall be UL listed as being compatible with the fire alarm control panel. The communicator transmitter shall have the capability of transmitting by point or event and supervising two telephone lines, sending an alarm signal on one or both lines, reporting the loss of service on either telephone line and in the event that both lines fail, a local trouble signal shall sound. External connection to each of two telephone lines shall be made through RJ31X jacks. In addition the communicator shall be capable of being programmed to send a test signal to the central station once every 24 hours at any user selected time.

3. No. 4100-9001 Control Panels to provide for remote location of amplifiers, batteries, power supplies, chargers, etc., required for the operation of notification appliance circuits; requiring only data communication with the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Data communication shall be style 7 supervised via a shielded twisted pair cable. Each





Control Panel shall be equipped with an LCD display and capable of continuous operation with the devices supported on that floor upon loss of communication with Main Control Panel.

4. No. 4098-9714 "True Alarm" Smoke Sensor with No. 4098-9792 Sensor Base: Smoke sensor shall be of the addressable photoelectric type with full range field adjustable sensitivity and with automatic compensation for environmental changes to provide digitized values of smoke concentration to Main Fire Alarm Control Panel; refer to drawings for quantity of smoke sensors required.

5. No. 4098-9733 "True Alarm" Heat Sensor with No. 4098-9792 Sensor Base: Heat sensor shall be capable of combination rate-of-rise or fixed temperature sensor with self restoring operation with rate-of-rise operation being selectable between 15 F. per minute or 20 F. per minute rate of temperature rise. Fixed temperature setting shall be 135 F.; refer to drawings for quantity required.

6. No. 4098-9756 Duct Mounted "True Alarm" Smoke Sensor: Smoke sensor shall be of the addressable photoelectric type with full range field adjustable sensitivity and with automatic compensation for environmental changes to provide digitized values of smoke concentration to Main Fire Alarm Control Panel. Duct detector shall be complete with sensor head, baffle, and proper length sampling tube; refer to drawings for quantity required.

7. No. 4099-9003 Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Box with No. 2975-9178 Back Box: Addressable manual fire alarm station shall be a single action station with integrally mounted addressable electronics and suitable for flush or surface mounting; refer to drawings for quantity required. The maximum force required to operate manual fire alarm box shall be 5LbF as required to meet ADA guidelines. Resetting must be accomplished via a key switch that is keyed to match the locking mechanism on all of the Fire Alarm Panel enclosures.

8. No. 4090-9002 Supervised Individual Addressable Relay Module: communicating with Main Fire Alarm Control Panel; each Module with SPDT relay contacts, each rated 1 ampere @ 24VDC, and 2 amperes @ 120 volt A.C. to shut down air handling systems and to signal building elevators, as hereinafter described; refer to drawings for quantity required.

9. No. 4090-9001 Supervised Individual Addressable Module (IAM): communicating with Main Fire Alarm Control Panel; each module to monitor sprinkler system tamper or flow switches; refer to drawings for quantity required.

10. No. 4090-9120 Supervised Multi-Point Addressable Module: communicating with Main Fire Alarm Control Panel; each module to monitor sprinkler system tamper or flow switches; refer to drawings for quantity required. Each module is capable of monitoring up to 4 input circuits and controlling two output relays from a single module; refer to drawings for quantity required.

11. No. 4098-9754 TrueAlarm Multi-Sensor: Smoke sensor shall be of the addressable photoelectric type with full range field adjustable sensitivity and with automatic compensation for environmental changes to provide digitized values of smoke concentration to Main Fire Alarm Control Panel. This detector shall also contain thermal sensing accurately monitoring fixed temperature and rate of rise temperature, selected or combined as required per sensor. Refer to drawings for quantity of smoke sensors required.

12. No. 4098-9796 TrueAlarm Sensor Isolator Base: Smoke sensor base shall contain a isolator relay allowing a compatible fire alarm control panel to separate shorted communication wiring form functioning wiring to optimize the survivability of the circuit. Refer to drawings for device locations.





13. No. 4090-9101 & 4090-9106 Zone Adapter Modules: Zone adapter modules capable of monitoring 2-wire or 4-wire smoke detectors with power resetting connections for 4-wire devices on the 4090-9101 module. Refer to drawings for device locations

14. No. 4090-9121 Security Monitor Module: This module shall be capable of supervised Class B monitoring of normally closed dry contact security devices. Monitoring conditions are open, normal, abnormal and short.

15. No. 4090-9016 Addressable Isolator Module: This module shall be a dual port bi-directional communications isolator for use with the 4100-9001 Signaling Line Circuits. Either port shall serve as an input or output; ports shall automatically separate upon a communication short circuit. Earth fault isolation shall also be a feature of this module.

16. No. 4090-9117 Power Isolator Module: This module shall be a dual port bi-directional power isolator for use with the 4100-9001 power circuits. Either port shall serve as an input or output; ports shall automatically separate upon a power line short circuit. Earth fault isolation shall also be a feature of this module.

17. No. 2097 Series Type OS&YSU Control Valve Supervisory Switches: Valve supervisory switch shall be suitable for monitoring valve activity of outside screw and yoke gate valves from 2" to 12" nominal size. Switch shall be mounted in NEMA Type 4 enclosure with die cast aluminum cover with red enamel finish. Provide one SPDT switch: refer to drawings for quantity required.

18. No. 4903-935X Audible/Visible Notification Appliance for Wall Mounting: Audible/visible units shall contain a speaker and a strobe in a common red rectangular vertical wall mount enclosure with white FIRE lettering. The audible portion of the appliance shall be UL 1480 listed and shall consist of a high quality speaker and must be capable of emergency alarm/voice instruction. The speaker shall have smooth frequency response with minimal distortion and shall be compatible with 70 VRMS circuits. The speaker shall be equipped with individual impedance matching transformer with 0.25W, 0.5W, 1W and 2W taps. The visible portion of the appliance shall be UL 1971 listed and shall consist of a Xenon flashtube, shall be of the addressable type and shall be equipped with a tamper resistant lens which securely latches into the A/V housing. Minimum flash effective intensity shall be 15 cd, unless a higher rating is indicated on the drawings. Flash rate shall be 1 Hz, synchronized. Refer to drawings for quantity required and candela rating at each location.

19. No. 4903-936X Audible/Visible Notification Appliance for Ceiling Mounting: shall be similar to Paragraph 4.1.19 except the audible portion of the device shall be mounted in a round white housing and the strobe shall be mounted in a white ceiling mounted enclosure with red FIRE lettering affixed to the grill of the speaker. Refer to drawings for quantity required and for candela rating at each location.

20. No. 4902-9716 Audible Notification Appliance for Wall Mounting: shall be similar to the audible portion of Paragraph 4.1.19. Refer to drawings for quantity required.

21. No. 4902-9721 Audible Notification Appliance for Ceiling Mounting: shall be similar to the audible portion of Paragraph 4.1.19 except shall be mounted in a round white housing with no lettering on the grill of the speaker. Refer to drawings for quantity required.

22. No. 4904-935X Visible Notification Appliance for Wall Mounting: shall be similar to the visible portion of Paragraph 4.1.19. Refer to drawings for quantity required and for candela rating of each device.

23. No. 4904-93XX Visible Notification Appliance for Ceiling Mounting: shall be similar to the visible portion of Paragraph 4.1.19 except shall be mounted in a white ceiling mounted enclosure with red FIRE lettering. Refer to drawings for quantity required and for candela rating at each location.





2.5 OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM

A. Fire Alarm Control Panel shall continuously interrogate its addressable devices on the communication channels for status condition such as: normal, alarm or trouble. In addition, fire alarm control panels communicating with "True Alarm" smoke sensors and temperature sensors, shall cause each sensor to transmit an analog output value based upon its condition. The system shall maintain a current value, peak value and an average value of each sensor=s output. Alarm status shall be determined by comparing the current sensor value to its average value. Utilizing each sensor's average value as a continuously shifting reference point filters out environmental factors which would otherwise increase the probability of false alarms caused by shifts in sensitivity. "True Alarm" system operation shall also automatically indicate when a sensor is dirty, shall permit sensor sensitivity to be individually varied automatically by time of day and shall permit two-stage (pre-alarm and alarm) indication for each "True Alarm" sensor. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be capable of on-site programming to accommodate system expansion up to a maximum of 2000 circuits, and facilitate changes in operation including editing special instructions and operating sequences. All software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile EPROM memory. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory. The system shall have the capability of recalling 600 alarm, trouble and supervisory conditions in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history. A multi-channel audio module shall provide for one-way voice communication for up to 8 channels over a single pair of wires. Include provisions for simultaneous operation of 2 digitally prerecorded voice messages and manual paging. Alarm tones and customized digitally prerecorded voice messages will alert occupants of a fire or other emergency situations. Evacuation signaling may be automatically generated via alarm initiated event programs or manually generated by fire fighting personnel utilizing a hand held push-to-talk microphone. The microphone shall be a dynamic communication type with a frequency range of 200 Hz to 4000 Hz and shall be equipped with a self-winding five foot coiled cable. An LED indicator shall be provided to indicate microphone push-to-talk button has been pressed and speaker circuits are ready for transmission. Microphone shall be supervised from disconnection. Speaker circuits shall be supplied which are capable of supplying audio signals at 70 VRMS supplied by the system amplifiers. Supervision for fault conditions shall be provided. Individual and distinct trouble indications shall be provided for each fault. The audio alarm signal shall consist of digitized slowly ascending "Whoop" tone from 200 to 830 Hz in 2.5 seconds for a maximum of 10 seconds followed by automatic pre-selected voice evacuation messages. At the end of each voice evacuation message, the alarm tone shall resume. The alarm tones shall sound until the alarm silence switch at the Main Fire Alarm Control, has been operated. All audio alarm operations (speaker circuit selection and alarm tone/voice message timing variations) shall be activated by the system software so that authorized personnel can facilitate any required future changes to the evacuation sequence without any component rewiring. The system shall be configured to allow selective voice paging. Upon activation of any speaker manual control switch, two (2) seconds of tone shall sound over the speakers indicating an impending voice message will occur. If any speaker manual control switches are activated, the control panel operator shall be able to make announcements via the push-to-talk paging microphone over the preselected speakers. Facility for total building evacuation and paging shall be provided to allow for activation of speakers. This shall be accomplished by the means of an "All Circuit" switch. A minimum of one isolation base or module must be used for every five initiating devices. This module shall be a dual port bi-directional communications isolator for use with the 4100-9001 Signaling Line Circuits. Either port shall serve as an input or output; ports shall automatically separate upon a communication short circuit. Earth fault isolation shall also be a feature of this module.

B. The operation of the fire, smoke detection and alarm system shall be as follows:

1. Under normal conditions, alphanumeric liquid crystal displays (LCD) located on Fire Alarm Control Panel shall display a "System is Normal', message and the current time and date.





2. The initiation of any automatic smoke, heat or water flow sensor or a manual fire alarm station on any floor of the building shall cause the following to occur:

a. Cause a pulsing alarm tone to operate within the Main Fire Alarm Control Panel as well as individual remote LCD annunciators throughout the building until the alarm silence switch is operated.

b. Cause all audible and visible alarm indicating appliances to operate throughout the building until the alarm silence switch is operated.

c. Cause the Fire Alarm Control Panel to generate a specific unique code for each sensor or manual fire alarm station and identify the device(s) in alarm at the Fire Alarm Control Panel liquid crystal display (LCD). The codes shall be software generated to facilitate programming changes at a later date due to system changes.

d. Cause an alarm LED to be illuminated at the Fire Alarm Control Panel, as well as at individual remote LCD annunciators throughout the building.

e. Cause all door hold-open devices to release doors normally held open. f. Cause certain emergency egress doors to unlock.

C. In addition to the operations listed above, the initiation of an automatic duct mounted smoke sensor(s) located in the return plenums of building air conditioning systems shall cause the associated air conditioning system to shut down.

D. In addition to the operations listed above, the initiation of any automatic smoke sensor or heat sensor located in elevator machine room or in elevator lobby shall cause the elevator control panels to accomplish the following (connections within elevator control panel and all elevator control interface shall be performed by Elevator Contractor):

SCHEDULE OF PASSENGER ELEVATOR ACITIVATION SERVING STAGE LEVEL AND SECOND LEVEL

LOCATION OF ALARMED SMOKE OR HEAT SENSOR

Passenger Elevator Lobby on Stage Level or Machine Room

Passenger Elevator Lobby on Second Level Stage Level

E. The initiation of any trouble or supervisory condition shall cause the following to occur:

1. Cause the Fire Alarm Control Panel to generate a specific unique code for each type and location of failure.

2. Cause a trouble or supervisory LED to be illuminated at Fire Alarm Control Panel, as well as at individual remote LCD annunciators located throughout the building.

3. Cause a low level audible signal to sound at Fire Alarm Control Panel as well as at individual remote LCD annunciators located throughout the building.

F. Means shall be provided so that upon activation of alarm, trouble, or supervisory conditions; the audible alarm may be silenced and the condition acknowledged at the Main Fire Alarm Control Panel.

G. Means shall be provided so that the system is capable of being tested by one person. While in "Walk-Test" mode, the activation of any initiating device shall be silently logged as an alarm condition in the historical data file, which shall include a time and date stamp of each alarm. The Main Fire Alarm Control Panel shall automatically reset itself after logging the alarm. The





momentary disconnection of an initiating or notification appliance circuit shall likewise be silently logged as a trouble condition. The main Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be programmed with a separate testing group per floor or defined area with a maximum of (8) groups. Whereby one group of points may be in a testing mode and the other groups may be active and operate as programmed for normal system operation. After testing is completed, data may be retrieved from the historical log in chronological order to ensure device/circuit activation. Should the "Walk-Test" feature be left on for an inappropriate amount of time, it shall revert to normal operation automatically.

2.6 SUPERVISION & SURVIVABILITY

A. This system shall contain network communication, digital audio riser communication, and remote unit interface circuits wired as style 7. The system shall contain addressable points communicating over Style 7 signaling line circuits as well as Class A, notification appliance circuits so that a fault in any one circuit or point shall not affect any other circuit or point. The alarm activation of any initiation point shall not prevent the subsequent alarm operation of any other initiation point.

B. Each smoke sensor base shall include an internal isolator relay that shall separate shorted communication wiring from functional wiring. Each shorted condition shall be annunciated on all control panels. Each smoke detector base shall also be able to transmit earth fault conditions to each control panel.

C. Each addressable device that does not have an internal isolation relay shall have an external isolator installed in line with said device. This isolator shall separate shorted communication wiring from functional wiring. Each shorted condition shall be annunciated on all control panels. Each isolator shall also be able to transmit earth fault conditions to each control panel

D. Each fire alarm device that requires 24VDC shall include an addressable power isolator. This isolator shall separate shorted power wiring from functional wiring. Each shorted condition shall be annunciated on all control panels. Each addressable power isolator module shall also be able to transmit earth fault conditions to each control panel.

E. There shall be as many as required of speaker & strobe circuits. These shall be independently supervised and independently fused notification appliance circuits. Disarrangement conditions of any circuit shall not affect the operation of any other circuit. A single open circuit condition in any circuit shall not interrupt the operation of that circuit.

F. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be audibly and visually indicated at each control panel. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present.

G. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnections of the battery shall be audibly and visually indicated at all control panels.

H. Should a trouble condition be present within the system and the audible trouble signal silenced, the trouble signal shall resound at pre-programmed time intervals to act as a reminder that the system is not operational. Both the time interval and the trouble reminder signal shall be user programmable.





I. The system shall be password protected and shall have four (4) access levels with Level 4 being the highest level. Level 1 shall not require a password. Passwords shall consist of up to ten (10) digits.

2.7 POWER REQUIREMENTS

A. Each Fire Alarm Control Panel shall receive 120 volt A.C. power from dedicated circuits.

B. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 120 volt A.C. power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of twenty-four (24) hours with all audible and visible alarm indicating appliances activated for fifteen (15) minutes at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic.

C. All external circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 volt D.C. and shall be individually fused at the control panel.

2.8 INSTALLATION

A. The installation and wiring shall conform to other sections of this specification. This contractor shall furnish and install the complete system, wired, connected, tested, and left in first class condition. The installation shall be as shown on the contract drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. This contractor shall locate equipment in the exact locations specified on shop drawings supplied by the manufacturer. He shall install equipment in strict accordance with directions given in instruction manuals accompanying components and manufacturer's specifications for apparatus. State Fire Marshal shall certify contractor for fire alarm work.

B. The fire alarm equipment supplier shall be certified for fire alarm work by State Fire Marshal, be a UL Listed branch or distributor for the manufacturers equipment being installed, have NICET IV certified technical support staff, must have been in business servicing and installing fire alarm systems for the product represented for over 5 years in the Cincinnati area, and located within 50 miles of the installation site.

2.9 WIRING

A. All wiring shall be in strict accordance with NFPA 72, the National Electrical Code, and applicable state and local regulations. Wire sizes shall be as shown on the drawings and shall comply with the manufacturer's specifications for apparatus employed in system. Wiring shall be checked and tested by this contractor, in accordance with instructions provided by the manufacturer, to insure that system is free of grounds, opens, shorts, and that insulation resistance between current carrying conductors is 10 megohms or greater.

2.10 TESTING

A. Upon completion of installation, a factory-trained representative shall test and adjust the installation and certify that the system is properly installed and functioning. The system shall be UL Listed as an installed system and a UL Certificate provided to the system owner.





2.11 APPROVAL

A. The detectors and control equipment of the system shall be approved by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Factory Mutual, Canadian Standards Association, etc. The system shall be UL Listed as an installed system and a UL Certificate provided to the system owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

B. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high

ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A[ or Appendix B] in NFPA 72. See Editing Instruction No. 8 in the Evaluations for discussion about placement of smoke detectors for HVAC air inlets and outlets.

5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.

6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches (300 mm) from any part of a lighting fixture.

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct.

D. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.

E. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

Coordinate first paragraph below with Drawings.

F. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

G. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling.

H. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

I. Fire Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounting, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.





J. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this Section before making connections.

B. Connect supervised interface devices to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled.

1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 2. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 3. Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or phase-

reversal condition. 4. Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.


D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct the visual inspection prior to testing.





a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with the visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.





EARTH MOVING312000 - 1

SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade . 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 4. Subbase course for concrete walks. 5. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 6. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.


1. Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, 28, and 33 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures.

2. Division 31 Section "Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts" for excavation of shafts and disposal of surplus excavated material.

3. Division 32 Section "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading in turf and grass areas, including preparing and placing planting soil for turf areas.

4. Division 32 Section "Plants" for finish grading in planting areas and tree and shrub pit excavation and planting.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

C. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

D. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for





changes in the Work. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated

lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

G. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches when tested by a geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586.

H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Utility Locator Service: Give notice at least 48 hours in advance of excavation to the owners of underground utilities registered with the Ohio Underground Utility Protection Services (“OUPS” at www.oups.org, phone 800-362-2764), and the owners of the underground utilities shown on the plans and specifications who are not registered members of OUPS. The owner of the underground utility is required within 48 hours notice (excluding weekends and University holidays) to stake, mark or otherwise designate the location of its utilities in the construction area together with its approximate depth. In the event that any underground utility owner fails to timely perform, the Contractor shall notify the A/E and contact the owner of the underground utility. All costs shall be borne by the Contractor..





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 ighnches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

D. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

E. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

F. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

G. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

H. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.

I. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate.

J. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 GEOTEXTILES

A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.

B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and





subgrades.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe and conduit elevations to allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for bells of pipe.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Testing Agency when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If Testing Agency determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs with a pneumatic-tired and loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 20 tons to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by





Architect.

3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.11 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

3.13 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.





3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698:

1. Under structures and building slabs scarify and recompact top 24 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 98 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent.

3.16 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch.

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.





3.17 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE

A. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches thick. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches.

3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under walks as follows:

1. Shape subbase course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 2. Place subbase course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 3. Place subbase course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal

thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 4. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross

sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

3.19 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:

1. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 2. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal

thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 3. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not

less than 98 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements.

2. Determine that fill material and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. 3. Determine, at the required frequency, that in-place density of compacted fill complies

with requirements.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.





C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.

D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

1. Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests.

3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.

E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.21 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.22 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 312000





BLANK PAGE

glaserworksCommission 10005


SECTION 316329 - DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS

GENERAL1.1

Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit Shop Drawings of reinforcement and designA.mixes for concrete.

Drilled-Pier Standard: Comply with provisions of ACI 336.1, "Specification for theB.Construction of Drilled Piers," unless modified in this Section.

The slurry displacement method of installation will not be permitted.1.

Survey Work: Engage a registered surveyor or licensed professional engineer to performC.surveys, layouts, and measurements for drilled piers. Lay out each drilled pier to lines andlevels required before excavation and record actual measurements of each drilled pier'slocation, shaft diameter, bottom and top elevations, deviations from specified tolerances, andother specified data.

Record and maintain information pertinent to each drilled pier and cooperate with1.Owner's testing and inspecting agency to provide data for required reports.

Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities before excavating drilled piers. IfD.utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during drilled-pier operations.

PRODUCTS1.2

Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.A.

Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706, Grade 60.B.

Plain, Cold-Drawn Steel Wire: ASTM A 82.C.

Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.D.

Aggregates: ASTM C 33, 3/4-inch maximum aggregate size.E.

Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with otherF.admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions by mass of portland cement.

Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.1.Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494, of type appropriate to design mix.2.

Steel Pipe Casings: ASTM A 283, Grade C; or ASTM A 36carbon-steel plate, with verticalG.joints full-penetration welded according to AWS D1.1.

Concrete Mix: Prepare design mixes according to ACI 30. Proportion mixes according to ACIH.211.1 and ACI 301 to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

Compressive Strength (28 Day): 3000 psi.1.

© 2011 Glaser Associates, Inc.5/12/2011

DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS316329 - 1



Maximum Water-Cement Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.50.2.Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch and capable of maintaining a slump of 43.inches for 2 hours after placement.Air Content: 2.5 to 4.5 percent.4.

Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94. Do not add water afterI.mixing.

EXECUTION1.3

Unclassified Excavation: Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to bearingA.elevations regardless of character of materials or obstructions encountered.

Excavate shafts for drilled piers to indicated elevations. Remove loose material and water fromB.bottom of excavation.

Notify and allow testing and inspecting agency to test and inspect bottom of excavation. IfC.unsuitable bearing stratum is encountered, make adjustments to drilled piers as determined byArchitect.

Do not excavate shafts deeper than elevations indicated, unless approved by Architect.1.Additional excavation will be paid according to Contract provisions for changes in the2.Work.

Make auger probe to a depth below bearing elevation equal to bearing area of drilled pier.D.Determine whether voids, clay seams, or solution channels exist.

Test all drilled piers .1.

Temporary Casings: Install watertight steel casings of sufficient length and thickness to preventE.water seepage into shaft; to withstand compressive, displacement, and withdrawal stresses; andto maintain stability of shaft walls. Remove temporary casings during concrete placement.

Tolerances: Construct drilled piers to remain within the tolerances of ACI 336.1.F.

Install permanent steel pipe casings of minimum wall thickness indicated with inside clearG.diameter not less than diameter of drilled pier as excavation proceeds.

Comply with recommendations of CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating,H.placing, and supporting reinforcement.

Concrete Placement: Place concrete in a dry shaft in a continuous operation and withoutI.segregation immediately after inspection and approval of shafts by an independent testing andinspecting agency.

Other methods of depositing concrete may be used, if approved by Architect.1.

Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement operations to maintain aJ.head of concrete no less than 60 inches above casing bottom.





Field Quality Control: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspectingK.agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during excavation andconcrete placement for drilled piers.

A drilled pier report will be prepared for each drilled pier.1.Soil Testing: Bottom elevations, bearing capacities, and lengths of drilled piers indicated2.have been estimated from available soil data. Actual elevations and drilled-pier lengths,and bearing capacities will be determined by a qualified independent testing andinspecting agency on excavation. Final evaluations and approval of data will bedetermined by Architect.Concrete will be sampled and tested for quality control. Testing and inspecting agency3.will make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate concrete strengths orother requirements have not been met.

Remove surplus excavated material and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.L.






BLANK PAGE






CONCRETE PAVING321313 - 1

SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Walks.


1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete " for general building applications of concrete.

2. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in expansion and contraction joints within concrete paving and in joints between concrete paving and asphalt paving or adjacent construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS


1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified ready-mix concrete manufacturer.

B. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 4. Joint fillers.






A. Detectable Warning Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer of stamped concrete paving systems.

B. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist").

C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet or less. Do not use notched and bent forms.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from steel wire into flat sheets.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.

C. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as follows:





1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, gray portland cement Type I .

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service-record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar paving applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type

G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.4 CURING MATERIALS

A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

B. Water: Potable.

C. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,





the following:

a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; A-H Curing Compound #2 DR WB. b. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; DSSCC Clear Resin Cure. d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; DSSCC Clear Resin Cure. f. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. g. Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR. h. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR SERIES. i. Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E. j. SpecChem, LLC; PaveCure Rez. k. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear. l. Vexcon Chemicals Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips.

2.6 DETECTABLE WARNING MATERIALS

A. Detectable Warning Stamp: Semirigid polyurethane mats with formed underside capable of imprinting detectable warning pattern on plastic concrete; perforated with a vent hole at each dome.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Advanced Surfaces Inc. b. Matcrete Precision Stamped Concrete Tools. c. Southern Color N.A., Inc. d. Stampcrete International Ltd. e. Superior Decorative by Dayton Superior.

2. Size of Stamp: One piece 24 by 36 inches .

B. Liquid Release Agent: Manufacturer's standard, clear, evaporating formulation designed to facilitate release of stamp mats.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Advanced Surfaces Inc.; Liquid Release. b. Matcrete Precision Stamped Concrete Tools; Liquid Release Agent. c. Southern Color N.A., Inc.; SCC Clear Liquid Release. d. Stampcrete International Ltd.; Stampcrete Liquid Release. e. Superior Decorative by Dayton Superior; Pro Liquid Release.





2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.

2. When automatic machine placement is used, determine design mixtures and obtain laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.

B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45 . 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:

1. Air Content: 3-1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Hand compact prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.






3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.

2. Butt Joints: Use bonding agent at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 30 feet unless otherwise indicated.





2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if

joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not

indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip joint-filler sections together. 6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other

temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate grooving-tool marks on concrete surfaces.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast-in.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate





with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement dowels and joint devices.

H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

J. Cold-Weather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following:

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.

K. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3.8 DETECTABLE WARNINGS

A. Stamped Detectable Warnings: Install stamped detectable warnings as part of a continuous concrete paving placement and according to stamp-mat manufacturer's written instructions.





1. Before using stamp mats, verify that the vent holes are unobstructed. 2. Apply liquid release agent to the concrete surface and the stamp mat. 3. Stamping: After application and final floating of pigmented mineral dry-shake hardener,

accurately align and place stamp mats in sequence. Uniformly load, gently vibrate, and press mats into concrete to produce imprint pattern on concrete surface. Load and tamp mats directly perpendicular to the stamp-mat surface to prevent distortion in shape of domes. Press and tamp until mortar begins to come through all of the vent holes. Gently remove stamp mats.

4. Trimming: After 24 hours, cut off the tips of mortar formed by the vent holes. 5. Remove residual release agent according to manufacturer's written instructions, but no

fewer than three days after stamping concrete. High-pressure-wash surface and joint patterns, taking care not to damage stamped concrete. Control, collect, and legally dispose of runoff.

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture-retaining-cover curingas follows:

1. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears occurring during installation or curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3.10 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 3/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch. 4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.






A. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

2. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

3. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when it is 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

4. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at seven days and two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.

B. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


3.12 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.





TURF AND GRASSES329200 - 1

SECTION 32 92 00 - TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Seeding. 2. Sodding.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil, planting soil, planting mix or planting medium.

D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

I. Surface Soil: Whatever soil is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

1.3 SUBMITTALS






1. Certification of grass seed for seeded mix. 2. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod.

B. Product certificates.


A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

1. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

1. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling. 2. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth.

a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.

b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.


A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.

B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying.


A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods:

1. Seeded Turf: 60 days from date of planting completion. Written notice from contractor establishes planting completion date.

a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.

2. Sodded Turf: 60 days from date of planting completion. Written notice from contractor establishes planting completion date.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED

A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.

B. Seed Species: State-certified seed of grass species as follows:

1. Select Turf Type Tall Fescue Mixture: Turfgrass Inc. Florence, KY 41042 or as approved by Owner.

2.2 TURFGRASS SOD

A. Turfgrass Sod: Number 1 Quality/Premium, including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted.

B. Turfgrass Species: Select Turf Type Tall Fescue Sod: Motz Turf Farms, Ltd., 6280 Clough Pike, Cincinnati, OH 45244 or as approved by Owner.

2.3 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows:

1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.

2. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.

Retain one or more of first three paragraphs below. Sulfur is used to lower pH and neutralize alkaline soils. Revise descriptions and insert proprietary products if required.

B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, and with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve.

C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.

D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 (0.30-mm) sieve.

G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials. Retain one of two paragraphs below if required for planting soil mix(es) retained in "Planting Soils" Article.





H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight.

I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.

2.4 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through ½ inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings.

B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

C. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth.

2.5 FERTILIZERS

A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid.

B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.

C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.

2.6 PLANTING SOILS

A. Planting Soil ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent organic material content, or existing, native surface topsoil formed under natural conditions with the duff layer retained during excavation process or existing, in-place amended surface soil. Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes. Through soil testing verify the suitability of proposed soil and/or mix to determine if it is of a quality capable of producing a viable planting medium for growing the specified plants and maintaining healthy vigorous turf. Clean soil of roots, unwanted plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Amend all soils to provide optimum growing conditions for plants specified.





2.7 MULCHES

A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley.

2.8 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TURF AREA PREPARATION

A. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil

amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil. 3. Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish

grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

a. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.

B. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows:

1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers

according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture.

a. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening.

3. Remove stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter.

4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property.

C. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.

1. All planting grades to slope away from structure and pavements.

a. Bring to the attention of the Owner and Architect any grading that does not slope





away from structures and pavements.

D. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

E. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.2 SEEDING

A. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.

B. Sow seed at a total rate of 10lb/1000sf.

C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3 mm) of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

D. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre (42 kg/92.9 sq. m) to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inch in loose thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.

1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment.

E. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by spreading straw mulch to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inch in loose thickness over seeded areas.

3.3 SODDING

A. Lay sod within 12 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy.

B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.

1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs or steel staples spaced as

recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.

3. Obtain written permission from Owner to stake sod.

C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) below sod.

3.4 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and





performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

B. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain height appropriate for species without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings.

C. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.

3.5 SATISFACTORY TURF

A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:

1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. (0.92 sq. m) and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches (125 by 125 mm).

2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.






BLANK PAGE




PLANTS329300 - 1

SECTION 32 93 00 - PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Plants. 2. Planting soils.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

C. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil

1. Where mulch is present finished grade is top of mulch.

D. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

E. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

G. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

H. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.

I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

J. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

K. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban




PLANTS329300 - 2

environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. Surface soil may need to be tested and then amended for best plant growth.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils.

B. Samples of mulch.

C. Product certificates.

D. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year.


A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

1. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

1. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling. 2. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth.

a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.

b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.

C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at the project site, time and date to be coordinated with the Owner.


A. Deliver freshly dug plants.

B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.

C. Handle planting stock by root ball.




PLANTS329300 - 3

D. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist by healing them in with straw or other suitable material.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, unmatched appearance when plants are specified to match, unsightly or uncharacteristic forms not associated with the habit (shape, branching, leaf, bud, bark, size, etc.) of the species.

b. Structural failures, including plantings falling or blowing over.

2. Warranty Periods is from Date of written notification of Planting Completion from contractor:

a. Plant warrantee is 12 months.


A. Initial Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below.

1. Maintenance Period for Plants: Three months from date of planting completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

B. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.

C. Containerized plants to exhibit fully developed vigorous root systems that fully support the soil of the container when the container is removed, conversely root bound containers are not acceptable.




PLANTS329300 - 4

2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows:

1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.

2. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.

Retain one or more of first three paragraphs below. Sulfur is used to lower pH and neutralize alkaline soils. Revise descriptions and insert proprietary products if required.

B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve.

C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.

D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 (0.30-mm) sieve.

G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.

H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight.

I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.

2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2-inch (13-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

C. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant growth.

2.4 FERTILIZERS

A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid.




PLANTS329300 - 5

B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.

C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.

E. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots.

1. Size: 10-gram tablets. 2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent

potassium, by weight plus micronutrients.

2.5 PLANTING SOILS

2.6 Planting Soil ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent organic material content, or existing, native surface topsoil formed under natural conditions with the duff layer retained during excavation process or existing, in-place amended surface soil. Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes. Through soil testing verify the suitability of proposed soil and/or mix to determine if it is of a quality capable of producing a viable planting medium for growing the specified plants and maintaining healthy vigorous specimens. Clean soil of roots, unwanted plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Amend all soils to provide optimum growing conditions for plants specified.

2.7 MULCHES

A. Organic Mulch: Partially composted shredded hardwood bark mulch. Mulch is to have enough course material mixed into it to avoid caking, compacting or tightening of the mulch after placement.

2.8 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.




PLANTS329300 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION FOR PLANTS

A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter. 3. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate

vertical roots for bare-root stock. 4. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the

bottom of the root ball.

B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil, if amended to provide optimum growing conditions for plant specified.

C. Excavate planting beds as required to accommodate 12” depth of planting mix and meet finished grades and contouring.

1. Examine soil structure of subgrade to determine if water percolation will be suitable for specified plants.

a. Make adjustments to subsurface and/or modify subsurface drainage to provide a well drained subsurface condition and planting medium.

D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface with loose, uniformly fine texture conforming to design contours. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake in lifts to account for settlement, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.

1. All planting grades to slope away from structure and pavements.

a. Bring to the attention of the Owner and Architect any grading that does not slope away from structures and pavements.

3.2 PLANTING

A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1.

B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.

C. Set stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 6 inches above adjacent finish grades. Higher if heavy or wet conditions are encountered.

1. Use planting soil for backfill.




PLANTS329300 - 7

2. Balled and Burlapped: After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

4. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.

5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

D. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.

3.3 MULCHING

A. Spread specified mulch by hand to a depth of 2”. Smooth mulch to provide a finished consistent appearance. Do not compact.

1. Cultivate mulch if mulch is showing signs of caking.

3.4 PRUNING

A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches.

B. Prune, thin, and shape trees according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural form and character of specified plant.

3.5 PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.

B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use practices to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.

D. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner via email or other correspondence 24 hours prior to all applications to gain written authorization to proceed from Owner.




PLANTS329300 - 8

E. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.
